SAP Yard Logistics

194
User Guide CUSTOMER Document Version: 1.0.0 – 2018-01-26 SAP Yard Logistics

Transcript of SAP Yard Logistics

User Guide CUSTOMER

Document Version: 1.0.0 – 2018-01-26

SAP Yard Logistics

Content

1 SAP Yard Logistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2 What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102.1 What's New: Yard Request and Yard Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102.2 What's New: Environment, Health and Safety (EH&S) for Inbound and Outbound Yard Request/Yard

Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142.3 What's New: Yard Task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152.4 What's New: Yard Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182.5 What's New: Visual Yard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192.6 What's New: Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202.7 What's New: Data Archiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212.8 What's New: Miscelleneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3 Master Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233.1 Classification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233.2 General Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243.3 Dangerous Goods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Dangerous Goods Master. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Hazardous Substance Master. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.4 Handling Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Define Handling Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Assign Handling Resource to User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Assign Handling Resource to Queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Queue Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

3.5 Queue Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Define Queues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Maintain Queue Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3.6 Yard Cockpit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Maintain Colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Define Textures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Define Collada Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Define Visual Object Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Assign Visual Object Type to Packaging Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Assign Visual Object Type to Storage Bin Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Define Visual Object Status Color Coding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Define Yard Location Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

3.7 Yard Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

2 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Content

Yard Layout Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423.8 Internet of Things. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Assign Transportation Unit to Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Maintain Connection Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Maintain Internet of Things Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Pull Data from IoT Cloud. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Send Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

3.9 Maintenance Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Check-Out Transportation Units (without Yard Order). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Determine and Delete TU Objects With No SR Activity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Execute Mass Activation of Yard Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Upload and Create Transportation Units from csv File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

4 Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574.1 Yard Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Sections of a Yard Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Yard Request Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Yard Request / Yard Order Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Create Yard Request via Process Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Create Yard Request Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Yard Request - Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Yard Request - Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Business Partner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

4.2 Yard Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Sections of a Yard Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Yard Order Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Yard Request / Yard Order Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Create Yard Order Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Yard Order - Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Yard Order - Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Business Partner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108Check-In and Check-Out a Yard Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

5 Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125.1 Yard Task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Sections of a Yard Task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Transportation Unit Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Maintain Exception Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

SAP Yard LogisticsContent C U S T O M E R 3

Yard Task Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Create a Yard Task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Stacking of Transportation Units on Storage Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Yard Task - Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

5.2 Plan Transportation Unit Pick-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

6 Yard Mobile Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306.1 SAP Fiori Launchpad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Self Check-In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131Yard Task Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

7 Yard Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357.1 Launch Yard Cockpit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357.2 Display Loading Appointment List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377.3 Transportation Unit Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1377.4 Maintain Yard Transportation Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Cleaning of Transportation Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417.5 Display Fire Department List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427.6 Alert Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

8 Billing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

9 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479.1 Assign Warehouse Numbers/Business Partners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479.2 Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Check Arrival/Departure Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Execute Mass Processing of Time Based Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

9.3 Driver Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Define Texts for Driver Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Maintain Text Symbols for Driver Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Assign Text Messages to Activity Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

9.4 Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Define Spool Settings for Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Maintain Conditions for Yard Document Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

9.5 Data Archiving in Yard Logistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539.6 Questionnaire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Maintain Conditions for Questionnaire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Define Texts for Questionnaire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Maintain Text Symbols for Questionnaire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Assign Checks to Check Groups for Yard Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Assign Checks to Check Groups for Yard Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

9.7 Maintain User for Self Check-In per Checkpoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609.8 Integration to SAP EWM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

4 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Content

Assign Docking Location to Warehouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Assign External Warehouse ID to Storage Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Determine EWM Door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Maintain Logical Ports for EWM Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

9.9 Integration with SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Assign Docking Location and Loading Point to Yard Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Maintain Door Assignment to Docking Location and Loading Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

9.10 Integration with SAP Transportation Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

10 Dock Appointment Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

11 Data Protection and Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17011.1 Migration Report for SAP Yard Logistics Drivers to Business Partners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17011.2 Report to Update Start of Retention Time for Yard Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

12 Operations Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17112.1 Installation and Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17312.2 Migration for Release 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17712.3 Technical Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17912.4 Monitoring Concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18112.5 Administration and Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

SAP Yard LogisticsContent C U S T O M E R 5

1 SAP Yard Logistics

Product Information

Product SAP Yard Logistics

Release 2.0

Based On SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.3

SAP NetWeaver 7.50

Documentation Published November 2015

Last Documentation Update January 2018 (Release 2.0 SP02)

Use

Companies with yards need professional logistics processes to be able to withstand the competitive pressure in the worldwide markets. The yards need to be supported by a highly integrated and easy-to-use system in a complete supply chain. The SAP Yard Logistics solution provides check-in to check-out support for transportation units and is focused on the functionalities of Planning, Execution, Yard Operations, Yard Monitoring and Billing.

Integration

SAP NetWeaver platform 7.40 SP 14 (ABAP application server) is the current basis for the SAP Yard Logistics solution. To have the latest User Interface Technology available (especially for the UI5 part), we will use the newest User Interface Technology Component from NW7.50 that allows deployment on the SAP NetWeaver platform 7.40, which is the software component SAP_UI 7.50, SP04. The following figure provides the architecture overview, illustrating the key user roles and the solution components.

6 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

SAP Yard Logistics

System Landscape for SAP Yard Logistics

Customizing

You can make Customizing settings for Yard Logistics in SAP Customizing Implementation Guide (transaction SPRO) under Yard Logistics .

Features

The following functions are explained in this application help:

What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0

See What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 [page 10]

Master Data

SAP Yard LogisticsSAP Yard Logistics C U S T O M E R 7

● Classification [page 23]● General Settings [page 24]● Dangerous Goods [page 24]● Handling Resources [page 27]● Queue Management [page 30]● Yard Cockpit [page 35]● Yard Layout [page 41]● Internet of Things [page 44]● Maintenance Tools [page 53]

Yard Planning

● Yard Request [page 57]● Yard Order [page 82]

Yard Execution

● Plan Transportation Unit Pick-Up [page 126]● Yard Task [page 112]

Yard Mobile Operations

● SAP Fiori Launchpad [page 130]

Yard Monitoring

See Yard Monitoring [page 135]

● Launch Yard Cockpit [page 135]● Display Loading Appointment List [page 137]● Transportation Unit Overview [page 137]● Maintain Yard Transportation Unit [page 139]● Display Fire Department List [page 142]● Alert Monitor [page 143]

Billing

See Billing [page 145]

Settings

See Settings [page 147]

● Assign Warehouse Numbers/Business Partners [page 147]● Alerts [page 148]● Driver Communication [page 149]● Printing [page 151]● Data Archiving in Yard Logistics [page 153]● Questionnaire [page 155]● Maintain User for Self Check-In per Checkpoint [page 160]● Integration to SAP EWM [page 160]● Integration with SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling [page 163]● Integration with SAP Transportation Management [page 166]

Dock Appointment Scheduling

8 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

SAP Yard Logistics

See Dock Appointment Scheduling [page 168]

More Information

SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)

See SAP Library for SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM). Go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Extended Warehouse Management . Select a relevant release, for example, SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.3. Choose Application Help.

SAP Yard LogisticsSAP Yard Logistics C U S T O M E R 9

2 What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0

The following sections tell you what is new in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 and what has changed since the last release:

● What's New: Yard Request and Yard Order [page 10]● What's New: Environment, Health and Safety (EH&S) for Inbound and Outbound Yard Request/Yard Order

[page 14]● What's New: Yard Task [page 15]● What's New: Yard Monitoring [page 18]● What's New: Visual Yard [page 19]● What's New: Integration [page 20]● What's New: Data Archiving [page 21]● What's New: Miscelleneous [page 21]

2.1 What's New: Yard Request and Yard Order

The following table shows you what is new and what has changed in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 related to Yard Request and Yard Order:

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Yard request/yard order tem­plate

New You can now create a yard re­quest/yard order template. You can use this template to create similar yard requests/yard or­ders for frequently occurring in­coming and outgoing transports, like a train that arrives every Monday with a similar makeup.

Yard Request / Yard Order Tem­plate [page 62]

10 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Create yard request via proc­ess integration

Enhanced You can now create a yard re­quest automatically via process integration, for example, from SAP Transport Management sys­tem (part of standard system) or a legacy system. When you cre­ate a yard request automatically via process integration, you are not allowed to edit the yard re­quest document with some ex­ceptions.

You can release the yard request even if the Consistency Status of the yard request is Incomplete.

Create Yard Request via Process In­tegration [page 63]

References on yard request/yard order Overview screen

Enhanced You can now view the references maintained for the yard request and yard order from the Yard Re­quest/Yard Order overview screen.

● Yard Request Overview [page 61]

● Yard Order Overview [page 87]

References on yard request/yard order document

Enhanced You can now enter the docu­ments that are related to the yard request or the yard order header and items.

Reference [page 81]

Copy To <Inbound or Outbound> YR tab on yard re­quest/yard order document

Enhanced Once you have now created a yard request using this copy function and you have released the yard request, you cannot copy an opposite yard order from the generated yard order docu­ment screen. You have to release the opposite yard request to gen­erate the opposite yard order.

● Yard Request [page 57]● Yard Order [page 82]

TU Details option on yard re­quest/yard order document

New Now, if a TU is assigned to an item, you can select the TU Details option to view the TU document.

● Yard Request - Items [page 64]

● Yard Order - Items [page 90]

SAP Yard LogisticsWhat's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 C U S T O M E R 11

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Creating yard request/yard order manually

New You can now enter the planned start date and time on the initial screen when you are creating a yard request or a yard order manually.

● Yard Request - Tasks [page 75]

● Create Yard Request Manually [page 63]

● Yard Order - Tasks [page 102]● Create Yard Order Manually

[page 89]

TU Determination option on yard order document

New Now, if a yard order item does not have a TU assigned to it, you can select this option. The sys­tem gives you all the TU options that are suitable to the yard or­der item as per master data and classification data. You can se­lect a TU to assign it to the item.

Yard Order - Items [page 90]

Copy option on yard request/yard order document to copy a yard task

Enhanced You can now copy an existing yard task with its assigned items to a new one.

● Yard Request - Tasks [page 75]

● Yard Order - Tasks [page 102]

Update source/destination parent TU

Enhanced Now, if a yard task is assigned to a loading item and you change the TU Number for the carrying item, the system automatically updates the Source Parent TU or the Destination Parent TU for the assigned yard task.

Item Hierarchy [page 69]

Automatic adding of dates to yard request/yard order

New When you now create a yard re­quest or a yard order, the system automatically creates a date and time record with the current date and time as the start and end date and time.

Date and Time [page 79]

Validation of arrival date/time New The system now validates the ar­rival date/time during check-in of a yard order. The system al­lows check-in only if the driver is within the defined threshold limit.

Date and Time [page 79]

12 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Threshold limits and meas­urement values

New You can now define threshold limits. The limits of a threshold are used to validate TU measure­ments. If the TU measurement is not within the threshold limits, the system raises an alert (as de­fined in the threshold). You can maintain the threshold record with the values for a yard re­quest/yard order.

● Yard Request - Items [page 64]

● Yard Order - Items [page 90]● Sections of a Yard Task [page

113]● Maintain Yard Transportation

Unit [page 139]

SCAC New The SCAC field on a yard re­quest/yard order document uniquely identifies a carrier.

● Sections of a Yard Request [page 59]

● Sections of a Yard Order [page 85]

Self check-in New A driver of the vehicle can now use this application to check-in the yard order when he/she ar­rives at the gate of the yard.

● Self Check-In [page 131]● Maintain User for Self Check-

In per Checkpoint [page 160]

TU Control Redesign Enhanced An outbound yard order can now have control over the TU when you activate the outbound yard order to which the TU is as­signed.

Now, if there is an active inbound yard order and an active out­bound yard order that are using the same TU, during completion of inbound yard order, the TU control is switched to the out­bound yard order automatically.

The same TU can now be as­signed to two outbound yard or­ders in status Planned. How­ever, a TU can exist only in one active TU at any point in time.

● Transportation Unit Control [page 118]

● Yard Order [page 82]

For a complete list of changed and new features, see What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 [page 10].

SAP Yard LogisticsWhat's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 C U S T O M E R 13

2.2 What's New: Environment, Health and Safety (EH&S) for Inbound and Outbound Yard Request/Yard Order

The following table shows you what is new and what has changed in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 related to EH&S for Inbound and Outbound Yard Request/Yard Order:

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Dangerous Goods flag under Item Details section of yard order item

New You now have the indicator to determine whether the Content tab contains dangerous goods, that is, whether the DG Regulation field has an entry.

Yard Order - Items [page 90]

Additional fields related to dangerous goods under Content tab of yard order item and the TU overview list

Enhanced New fields related to dangerous goods have now been added- ID number, Class, Packing group, Hazard ident. no., Hazard Rating 1, Hazard Rating 2, Dangerous Goods Data Source Description

Yard Order - Items [page 90]

Customizing activity Define Yard Numbers for Dangerous Goods

Enhanced You now have the following Cus­tomizing settings for dangerous goods:

● Dangerous Goods field - To determine whether the yard is equipped to handle dan­gerous goods. If you select Yes here, it indicates that the yard is equipped to han­dle dangerous goods.The BAdI BAdI: Dangerous Goods Check (/SAPYL/DG_CHECK) runs only if the Dangerous Goods field is set to Yes.

● DG Check field - To deter­mine whether the danger­ous goods checks are appli­cable for the yard number

● DG Data Source field - To determine the dangerous goods data origin for the yard.

Dangerous Goods [page 73]

14 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0

Function Type of Change Description More Information

The BAdIs:

● BAdI: Dangerous Goods Data Redetermination for TU (/SAPYL/BADI_DG_DETERMINE_TU)

● BAdI: Dangerous Goods Data Redetermination for Yard Order (/SAPYL/BADI_DG_DETERMINE_YO)

New You now have the BAdIs to rede­termine dangerous goods data for TU and for yard request/yard order.

Dangerous Goods [page 73]

BAdI BAdI: Dangerous Goods Checks During Check-In/Check-Out (/SAPYL/DG_CHECK_CICO)

New You now have the BAdI to imple­ment the logic for dangerous goods checks during check-in/check-out of the yard order.

Dangerous Goods [page 73]

Quantity checks during loca­tion determination

New In the case of hazardous sub­stances, now the destination lo­cation determination is consid­ering quantity checks of the product.

● Sections of a Yard Task [page 113]

● Maintain Maximum Quantity for Storage Type [page 26]

Content history New Now, when the content of a TU is changed, for example, by an un­loading, then the previous con­tent is visible in the Content History tab.

● Transportation Unit Overview [page 137]

● Maintain Yard Transportation Unit [page 139]

Cleaning New You can now execute the clean­ing of the transportation unit.

Cleaning of Transportation Unit [page 141]

Fire department reporting New You can now determine the dan­gerous goods products stored in the transportation units in the yard.

Display Fire Department List [page 142]

For a complete list of changed and new features, see What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 [page 10].

2.3 What's New: Yard Task

The following table shows you what is new and what has changed in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 related to Yard Task:

SAP Yard LogisticsWhat's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 C U S T O M E R 15

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Activity Category Enhanced You can now classify ac­tivity types - movement, non-movement and load­ing/unloading/reloading. This is used during yard task execution to steer the process.

● Sections of a Yard Task [page 113]● Yard Request - Tasks [page 75]● Yard Order - Tasks [page 102]

Automatic activation of first yard task

New You can now make set­tings such that the first yard task of an inbound yard order gets activated during check-in and the first yard task of an out­bound yard order gets activated during activa­tion of the yard order.

Check-In and Check-Out a Yard Order [page 109]

Automatic activation of sub­sequent yard tasks of a yard order

Enhanced You can now make set­tings such that the sub­sequent yard tasks of a yard order gets activated.

Check-In and Check-Out a Yard Order [page 109]

Yard task queue New You can now change the queue for a yard task when the status of the yard task is either Active or In Process.

Sections of a Yard Task [page 113]

Change assigned user New You can now change the user who is already as­signed to a yard task when the status of the yard task is Active.

Sections of a Yard Task [page 113]

16 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Enhancements to default tasks

Enhanced ● You can now main­tain a setting that controls whether the yard request/yard order items are au­tomatically assigned to the default tasks or not. All items are always assigned.

● You can now make settings for the sys­tem to create differ­ent default yard tasks for inbound and outbound yard orders.

● Yard Request - Tasks [page 75]● Yard Order - Tasks [page 102]

Display yard task in status Created

New You can now see the yard tasks belonging to the status Created from the Yard Task Overview screen. You, however, cannot edit this yard task from the yard task docu­ment.

Sections of a Yard Task [page 113]

Determination of source loca­tion for a yard task

New During activation of the yard task, now the sys­tem automatically as­signs the actual location of the yard transporta­tion unit assigned to the first yard task item as the source location if the source location is 'initial'.

● Yard Request - Tasks [page 75]● Yard Order - Tasks [page 102]● Sections of a Yard Task [page 113]

Cancel yard task when the status of the yard task is Pending, Active or In Process

New You can now cancel a yard task from the yard task user interface when the status of the yard task is Pending, Active or In Process .

Sections of a Yard Task [page 113]

SAP Yard LogisticsWhat's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 C U S T O M E R 17

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Driver Communication New You use this function to define texts that can be sent to the driver of the vehicle as text messages on his/her mobile phone when a yard task is acti­vated.

Driver Communication [page 149]

Activity Type for Cleaning Deleted and En­hanced

Customizing activity Define Activity Types for Cleaning is deleted and a checkbox for Cleaning is added in the existing Customizing activity Define Activity Types.

Cleaning of Transportation Unit [page 141]

For a complete list of changed and new features, see What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 [page 10].

2.4 What's New: Yard Monitoring

The following table shows you what is new and what has changed in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 related to Yard Monitoring:

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Transportation Unit Overview screen

Enhanced You can now select a TU to:

● Update Loading Scheme for the TU

● Block / Unblock the TU● Display Content History for

the TU● Display the threshold limits.

The limits of a threshold are used to validate TU measure­ments. If the TU measure­ment is not within the thresh­old limits, the system raises an alert (as defined in the threshold).

Transportation Unit Overview [page 137]

18 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Check-out transportation units (without yard order)

New You can now check-out the trans­portation units that exist on the yard and are not assigned to a yard order.

Check-Out Transportation Units (without Yard Order) [page 53]

Change transportation unit content from transportation unit document

New You can now edit some of the in­formation from the transportation unit document

Maintain Yard Transportation Unit [page 139]

New tabs on the transporta­tion unit document

New You now have the following new tabs on the transportation unit document: Content History, Content, Dimensions, Loading Scheme, Classification Data, Threshold.

Maintain Yard Transportation Unit [page 139]

Plan Transportation Unit Pick-Up

Enhanced ● You now have the Filter by Classifications option - Only if this option is set to Selected, the TU search considers the yard order item classification for TU reservation.

● When a user now selects/marks a yard order item, the system updates and executes the TU search according to the master data attributes from the selected yard order item.

Plan Transportation Unit Pick-Up [page 126]

Sequence of TUs in a Storage Bin

Enhanced Under the Sequence tab of the TU document, the system now dis­plays all the TUs that are preced­ing and succeeding the current TU on the same storage bin.

Maintain Yard Transportation Unit [page 139]

Loading Appointment List New You can now search for the loading appointments from a specific yard based on certain search criteria.

Display Loading Appointment List [page 137]

For a complete list of changed and new features, see What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 [page 10].

2.5 What's New: Visual Yard

The following table shows you what is new and what has changed in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 related to Visual Yard:

SAP Yard LogisticsWhat's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 C U S T O M E R 19

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Show more details for TU Enhanced You can now right-click a TU to display more details.

Launch Yard Cockpit [page 135]

Filter by more attributes, only show the selected TUs

Enhanced You are now provided with the TU filter functionality to sup­port filtering on the some fields.

Launch Yard Cockpit [page 135]

Visual object status color cod­ing

Enhanced You can now define the color in which the system should dis­play the transportation unit on the yard cockpit based on the visual object status of the transportation unit.

Define Visual Object Status Color Coding [page 40]

For a complete list of changed and new features, see What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 [page 10].

2.6 What's New: Integration

The following table shows you what is new and what has changed in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 related to Integration with other systems:

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Warehouse visit New You can now maintain ware­house visits for yard request/yard order item so that the sys­tem can send notifications to different EWM warehouses.

● Yard Request - Items [page 64]

● Yard Order - Items [page 90]

Internet of Things New The SAP HANA Cloud Platform Internet of this things services are now used in SAP Yard Logis­tics to retrieve data from IoT devices, for example, sensor that was previously stored in SAP HCP. The data is pulled from the SAP HCP by SAP Yard Logistics.

Internet of Things [page 44]

20 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Dock Appointment Schedul­ing

New You can now integrate SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling with SAP Yard Logistics.

● Dock Appointment Scheduling [page 168]

● Integration with SAP Dock Ap­pointment Scheduling [page 163]

For a complete list of changed and new features, see What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 [page 10].

2.7 What's New: Data Archiving

The following table shows you what is new and what has changed in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 related to Data Archiving:

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Data Archiving New You now have data archiving in SAP Yard Logistics to re­move mass data from the da­tabase that is no longer re­quired in the system but must be kept in a format that can be analyzed.

Data Archiving in Yard Logis­tics [page 153]

Archiving object /SAPYL/YO New You now have this archiving object for archiving Yard Or­ders and Yard Requests.

See the UI help for the archiv­ing object

Archiving object /SAPYL/YT New You now have this archiving object for archiving Yard Tasks.

See the UI help for the archiv­ing object

Archiving object /SAPYL/TU New You now have this archiving object for archiving Yard Transportation Units.

See the UI help for the archiv­ing object

For a complete list of changed and new features, see What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 [page 10].

2.8 What's New: Miscelleneous

The following table shows you what is new and what has changed in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 - Miscellenous Topics:

SAP Yard LogisticsWhat's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 C U S T O M E R 21

Function Type of Change Description More Information

Printing of yard documents Enhanced You can now print the yard docu­ments like yard requests, yard or­ders, and yard tasks in the follow­ing ways:

● Using the Print button on the top of the screen

● From the Output Management tab of the yard document

Printing [page 151]

Questionnaire for yard order/yard task

New You can now maintain question­naires for yard orders and yard tasks. The system generates this questionnaire when you create a yard order/yard task. You must an­swer the questions before you check-in/check-out the yard order or confirm the yard task, respec­tively. You can answer these ques­tions from the yard order/yard task desktop application or from the Fiori UI..

Questionnaire [page 155]

Classification Data New You can now maintain the classifi­cation data for TUs. This is used during TU determination.

● Classification [page 23]● Yard Request - Items [page

64]● Yard Order - Items [page

90]● Yard Task [page 112]● Maintain Yard Transportation

Unit [page 139]

TU assignment despite differ­ent TU classification data

New You can assign any TU to a yard or­der item even if not all classifica­tion data are compatible between the item and TU.

● Yard Request - Items [page 64]

● Yard Order - Items [page 90]

● Yard Task [page 112]

Loading Scheme Enhanced You can now edit the Loading Layout for the parent item only if the current TU does not have any child TU. You can edit the Positioning for a child item.

● Yard Order - Items [page 90]

● Yard Task - Items [page 123]● Maintain Yard Transportation

Unit [page 139]

For a complete list of changed and new features, see What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0 [page 10].

22 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

What's New in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0

3 Master Data

You can maintain the master data for the following functions:

● Classification [page 23]● General Settings [page 24]● Dangerous Goods [page 24]● Handling Resources [page 27]● Queue Management [page 30]● Yard Cockpit [page 35]● Yard Layout [page 41]● Internet of Things [page 44]● Maintenance Tools [page 53]

3.1 Classification

You use this function to maintain master data for classification data of TUs. A TU is classification­relevant if there is an assignment between the TU Type and the classification class. The TU classification is the basis for adding characteristics to it. These characteristics are used to represent additional attributes for a transportation unit, defined for the individual processes.

You can maintain the following master data for classification data of TUs:

● Maintain Characteristics - You can define the characteristics for the standard class type CTU. To do so, from the user interface, go to Master Data Classification Maintain Characteristics (or transaction CT04). See http://help.sap.com/saphelp_scm41/helpdata/en/bc/a57767d78a1b4db5941aa10351524f/frameset.htm.

● Maintain Classes - You can define the classes for the standard class type CTU. To do so, from the user interface, go to Master Data Classification Maintain Classes (or transaction CL02). See http://help.sap.com/saphelp_scm41/helpdata/en/d2/f63349ccacef4594b7cad2cdb00adb/frameset.htm.

● Assign Classes to Transportation Unit Types - You can assign classes to TU types for Classification Data of TUs. To do so, from the user interface, go to Master Data Classification Assign Classes to Transportation Unit Types .

Related Information

Yard Order - Items [page 90]Yard Request - Items [page 64]

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 23

3.2 General Settings

Maintain Determination Rule for Packaging Material (TU)

See SAP Library for SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM). Go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Extended Warehouse Management select a relevant release, for example, SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.3 Application Help . Go to

Warehouse Structure Vehicle Transportation Unit .

● Maintain Supply Chain UnitFor more information, see SAP Library for SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM). Go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Extended Warehouse Management select a relevant release, for example, SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.3 Application Help . Go to SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) Warehouse Structure Supply Chain Unit (SCU) .

● Maintain ProductProducts are used in SAP Yard Logistics to represent the dimension of a transportation unit like length or weight.For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM). Go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Extended Warehouse Management select a relevant release, for example, SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.3 Application Help . Go to SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) Handling Unit (HU) Packaging Materials .

● Maintain Link between Packaging Material (TU) and Means of TransportHere, you assign a packaging material to a means of transport. This setting is required to form a transportation unit in the system. If this setting is missing, processing of transportation units is not possible in the Yard Logistics solution.

● Define Default Location for Yard Order / Yard Request – Allows you to define default arrival and departure location data for a yard and an order type. When you create a yard order or a yard request, in the Locations section, the system defaults the arrival and departure Checkpoint, Storage Type, Storage Section, Storage Bin that you have maintained here. The system defaults the arrival location for the inbound yard order or yard request and the departure location for the outbound yard order and yard request.

3.3 Dangerous Goods

You use this function to maintain the master data settings for dangerous goods.

● Dangerous Goods Master [page 25]● Hazardous Substance Master [page 25]

24 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

3.3.1 Dangerous Goods Master

The dangerous goods master provides dangerous goods­specific data for logistic processes in the SAP system.

● Create Dangerous Goods Master - See http://help.sap.com/erp_hcm_ias_2012_03/helpdata/en/de/516fd04c4b11d18a110000e816ae6e/content.htm?frameset=/en/de/516fd04c4b11d18a110000e816ae6e/frameset.htm&current_toc=/en/de/5174db4c4b11d18a110000e816ae6e/plain.htm&node_id=17

● Change Dangerous Goods Master - See http://help.sap.com/erp_hcm_ias_2012_03/helpdata/en/de/516ff74c4b11d18a110000e816ae6e/content.htm?frameset=/en/de/516fd04c4b11d18a110000e816ae6e/frameset.htm&current_toc=/en/de/5174db4c4b11d18a110000e816ae6e/plain.htm&node_id=19

● Display Dangerous Goods Master - See http://help.sap.com/erp_hcm_ias_2012_03/helpdata/en/de/5170044c4b11d18a110000e816ae6e/content.htm?frameset=/en/de/516ff74c4b11d18a110000e816ae6e/frameset.htm&current_toc=/en/de/5174db4c4b11d18a110000e816ae6e/plain.htm&node_id=20

3.3.2 Hazardous Substance Master

You use this function to edit hazardous substance master records.

● Maintain EHS: Hazardous Substance - See http://help.sap.com/erp_hcm_ias_2012_03/helpdata/en/85/90f74059890b06e10000000a155106/content.htm?frameset=/en/46/2e39510baf4251e10000000a1553f6/frameset.htm&current_toc=/en/57/1e5a3e740be946e10000000a114084/plain.htm&node_id=4&show_children=false

● Assign Separation Keys to Product Master Data [page 25]● Maintain Maximum Quantity for Storage Type [page 26]

3.3.2.1 Assign Separation Keys to Product Master Data

Use

Use this function to assign separation keys to the product master data in case of dangerous goods.

Prerequisites

You have defined the separation keys in Customizing for Define Separation Keys for Dangerous Goods under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Dangerous Goods .

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 25

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Dangerous Goods Hazardous Substance Master Assign Separation Keys to Product Master Data .The Change View Assign Separation Keys to Product Master Data: Overview screen appears.

2. Select the New Entries option.3. Enter the Product4. Select the Separation Key and save your entries.

3.3.2.2 Maintain Maximum Quantity for Storage Type

You use this function to define the maximum storage quantity within storage type and storage section per storage class group. This function is used during location determination/validation of yard task to check that the quantity of the product does not exceed the maximum quantity of the determined destination storage bin.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Dangerous Goods Hazardous Substance Master Maintain Maximum Quantity for Storage Type .The Maintain Maximum Quantity for Storage Type screen appears.

2. Select New Entries.3. Enter the storage type and the storage section.4. Assign the storage class group.

Note

You have defined the storage class group in Customizing for Define Storage Class Groups under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks Location Determination Quantity Checks

5. Enter the maximum quantity allowed for the storage bin and save your entries.

Related Information

Sections of a Yard Task [page 113]

26 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

3.4 Handling Resources

Use

Use this process to manage the assignment of handling resource to users.

A handling resource is an equipment, for example, a shag truck, that can be used to execute yards tasks. In turn, the system uses the information of the handling resources that the user is currently using, for the assignment of yard tasks to the user for use in the mobile user interface.

Process

The process to assign a yard task to a user is as follows:

● The yard task is assigned manually or automatically to a queue. (For more information, see Maintain Queue Determination [page 31].)

● A handling resource can be assigned to one or multiple queues. (For more information, see Assign Handling Resource to Queue [page 29].)

● The user assigns himself/herself to a handling resource in the mobile. The system can also propose a handling resource if a handling resource is maintained for the user in the master data.

● Then the system determines potential yard tasks for the user based on the queues maintained for the handling resource.

● When starting the task in the mobile, the assigned user and the handling resource take over the yard task.

NoteThe handling resource and the user can be manually entered in the yard task. If this is the case, the system assigns this yard task to only this user and handling resource in the mobile user interface.

More Information

● Queue Management [page 30]● SAP Fiori Launchpad [page 130]

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 27

3.4.1 Define Handling Resources

Context

Use this procedure to define handling resources for a yard number, for example, a shag truck, a forklift or a crane.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Handling Resources Define Handling Resources .

The Define Handling Resources: Overview screen appears.2. Select the New Entries option.3. Select the Yard No.4. Enter the Handling Resource, for example, HR_FORKLIFT.

5. Enter a Handling Resource Description, for example, Forklift and save your entries.

3.4.2 Assign Handling Resource to User

Context

Use this procedure to assign a handling resource to a user. This allows you to manage the assignment of yard tasks to the user who is working with the yard task mobile user interface.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Handling Resources Assign Handling Resource to User .

The Assign Handling Resource to User: Overview screen appears.2. Select the New Entries option.3. Select the Yard No.4. Select the User.5. Select the Handling Resource and save your entries.

28 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

NoteYou can assign only one handling resource to a user.

Next Steps

SAP Fiori Launchpad [page 130]

3.4.3 Assign Handling Resource to Queue

Context

Use this procedure to assign handling resource to a queue with a sequence number that defines the priority of a queue for a handling resource.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Handling Resources Assign Handling Resource to Queue .

The Assign Handling Resource to Queue: Overview screen appears.2. Select the New Entries option.3. Select the Yard No.4. Select the Handling Resource, for example, HR_FORKLIFT.

5. Select the Queue, for example, QU02.

6. Enter a Sequence Number, for example, 1 or 2 and save your entries.

NoteThe user connects to a handling resource, for example, when he/she starts the mobile application. You can assign a handling resource to multiple queues. Hence, in the mobile application, the user can view the tasks that are assigned to the handling resource.

The system first assigns the queue with the higher priority, for example, Sequence Number as 1, to the user. If this queue does not have any task assigned to it, the system assigns the queue with the next priority, for example, Sequence Number as 2, to the user.

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 29

Next Steps

● Assign Handling Resource to User [page 28]● SAP Fiori Launchpad [page 130]

3.4.4 Queue Management

Use

Use this process to manage the assignment of yard tasks to the user who is working with the yard task mobile user interface.

A queue is a logical file to which the yard tasks for processing are assigned. Queues define a sequence of activities by which work in the yard is managed and assigned.

Process

The process to assign a task to a user is as follows:

● You can define a queue for a yard. You can define multiple queues for a yard. (For more information, see Define Queues [page 31].)

● You can assign the yard task to the queue manually or the system can assign it automatically.○ Manual assignment – You can enter the value of the field Yard Task Queue from the yard task user

interface.○ Automatic determination of queue – The system automatically determines the queue when you save the

yard task.○ The system automatically determines the queue only if you have not assigned a queue manually to

the yard task.○ The system automatically determines the queue based on the Activity Type, Source Storage Type and

the Destination Storage Type of the yard task. (For more information, see Maintain Queue Determination [page 31].)

● You can define a Handling Resource for a yard. You can define multiple handling resources for a yard. (For more information, see Define Handling Resources [page 28].)

● The Handling Resource can be assigned to a User. This is the default resource. If no resource is assigned to the user, the user selects the resource when starting a transaction in the mobile user interface. (For more information, see Assign Handling Resource to User [page 28].)

● The Handling Resource is assigned to a queue. (For more information, see Assign Handling Resource to Queue [page 29].)If multiple queues are assigned to a resource, the system sorts them according to their sequence. Within a queue, the tasks are sorted according to their priority. The queue priority is determined based on the planned start date of the task.

Now the user can see the list of tasks in the yard task mobile user interface.

30 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

More Information

Handling Resources [page 27]

3.4.4.1 Define Queues

Context

Use this procedure to define queues for a yard number.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Queue Management Define Queues .

The Define Queues: Overview screen appears.2. Select the New Entries option.3. Select the Yard No.4. Enter the Queue, for example, QU02.

5. Enter a Yard Task Queue Description , for example, Queue for Truck Tasks and save your entries.

Next Steps

Queue Management [page 30]

3.4.4.2 Maintain Queue Determination

Context

Use this procedure to maintain settings for automatic determination of queue when a yard task is saved.

● While creating a yard task, if you do not enter the queue manually and the queue determination is maintained in the master data, the system automatically determines the queue when you save the yard task.

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 31

● The system automatically determines the queue for a yard task based on the Activity Type, Source Storage Type and the Destination Storage Type of the yard task.

● The system executes this automatic determination of the queue only when you save the yard task for the first time.

● You can overwrite the queue that the system automatically determines.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Queue Management Maintain Queue Determination .

The Maintain Queue Determination: Overview screen appears.2. Select the New Entries option.3. Select the Yard No.4. Select the Activity Type.5. Select the Source Storage Type.6. Select the Destination Storage Type.7. Select the Queue that you have defined and save your entries. (For more information, see Define Queues [page

31].)

Next Steps

Queue Management [page 30]

3.5 Queue Management

Use

Use this process to manage the assignment of yard tasks to the user who is working with the yard task mobile user interface.

A queue is a logical file to which the yard tasks for processing are assigned. Queues define a sequence of activities by which work in the yard is managed and assigned.

Process

The process to assign a task to a user is as follows:

● You can define a queue for a yard. You can define multiple queues for a yard. (For more information, see Define Queues [page 31].)

32 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

● You can assign the yard task to the queue manually or the system can assign it automatically.○ Manual assignment – You can enter the value of the field Yard Task Queue from the yard task user

interface.○ Automatic determination of queue – The system automatically determines the queue when you save the

yard task.○ The system automatically determines the queue only if you have not assigned a queue manually to

the yard task.○ The system automatically determines the queue based on the Activity Type, Source Storage Type and

the Destination Storage Type of the yard task. (For more information, see Maintain Queue Determination [page 31].)

● You can define a Handling Resource for a yard. You can define multiple handling resources for a yard. (For more information, see Define Handling Resources [page 28].)

● The Handling Resource can be assigned to a User. This is the default resource. If no resource is assigned to the user, the user selects the resource when starting a transaction in the mobile user interface. (For more information, see Assign Handling Resource to User [page 28].)

● The Handling Resource is assigned to a queue. (For more information, see Assign Handling Resource to Queue [page 29].)If multiple queues are assigned to a resource, the system sorts them according to their sequence. Within a queue, the tasks are sorted according to their priority. The queue priority is determined based on the planned start date of the task.

Now the user can see the list of tasks in the yard task mobile user interface.

More Information

Handling Resources [page 27]

3.5.1 Define Queues

Context

Use this procedure to define queues for a yard number.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Queue Management Define Queues .

The Define Queues: Overview screen appears.

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 33

2. Select the New Entries option.3. Select the Yard No.4. Enter the Queue, for example, QU02.

5. Enter a Yard Task Queue Description , for example, Queue for Truck Tasks and save your entries.

Next Steps

Queue Management [page 30]

3.5.2 Maintain Queue Determination

Context

Use this procedure to maintain settings for automatic determination of queue when a yard task is saved.

● While creating a yard task, if you do not enter the queue manually and the queue determination is maintained in the master data, the system automatically determines the queue when you save the yard task.

● The system automatically determines the queue for a yard task based on the Activity Type, Source Storage Type and the Destination Storage Type of the yard task.

● The system executes this automatic determination of the queue only when you save the yard task for the first time.

● You can overwrite the queue that the system automatically determines.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Queue Management Maintain Queue Determination .

The Maintain Queue Determination: Overview screen appears.2. Select the New Entries option.3. Select the Yard No.4. Select the Activity Type.5. Select the Source Storage Type.6. Select the Destination Storage Type.7. Select the Queue that you have defined and save your entries. (For more information, see Define Queues [page

31].)

34 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

Next Steps

Queue Management [page 30]

3.6 Yard Cockpit

Use

You maintain the yard cockpit master data settings to be able to launch and work on the yard cockpit, and use the yard layout editor.

More Information

Launch Yard Cockpit [page 135]

3.6.1 Maintain Colors

Use

Use this function to define colors. You can use these colors to represent different object statuses (for example, Blocked), or the object color in the yard cockpit, like the storage bins and transportation units (TUs). You can use different color modes, for example, RGB, RGBA, to define the colors and to preview the colors.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Yard Cockpit Maintain Colors .The Maintain Colors screen appears.

2. Select the Edit button to create a new color, to edit or delete an existing color.3. Select the New button to create a new color.

1. Enter the name of the Color, for example, Green.2. Enter the Description of the color.3. Select the Color Model – RGB, RGBA, HLS, or HLSA.4. According to the Color Model that you have selected, you have to enter the color strings that make your

color. You can see the actual color in the box on the right side.5. Save your color.

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 35

4. Select a color and choose the Copy button to copy an existing color. You can give this copied color a new name.

5. Select a color and choose the Delete button to delete an existing color.

More Information

Define Visual Object Type [page 37]

3.6.2 Define Textures

Use

Use this function to define six-sided textures to visualize the transportation units (TUs) more appropriately in the yard cockpit, for example, textures for trucks, containers, railcars. You have to define the texture for a yard number and it requires a MIME-repository path.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Yard Cockpit Define Textures .The Define Textures: Overview screen appears.

2. Select the New Entries option.3. Select the Yard No.4. Enter the Texture Name, for example, CONT_TEXTURE for a container.5. Enter the Texture MIME Repository URL and save your entries.

3.6.3 Define Collada Model

Use

Use this function to define the Collada models, which provide a more appropriate visualization of transportation units (TUs) in the yard cockpit. It is a 3-dimensional model of the object to be displayed. Only while using Collada models you can represent a physical loading, for example, a container on top of a railcar.

36 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Yard Cockpit Define Collada Model .The Define Collada Models: Overview screen appears.

2. Select the New Entries option.3. Select the Yard No.4. Enter the Collada Model name, for example, TRAILER.5. Enter the Collada Model URL.6. Enter the Collada Model Scale – Length, Width and Height. This defines the dimensions of the visual object

type.

More Information

Define Visual Object Type [page 37]

3.6.4 Define Visual Object Type

Context

Use this procedure to define a visual object type and assign it to a yard. A visual object type defines the characteristics that are needed to properly display yard objects or locations, for example, storage bins, on the visual business control scene. A visual object type can have the following characteristics:

● ShapeYou can select a shape from the drop-down menu to visualize the shape of the object. The different shapes are as follows:○ Box: The system displays a box. This shape is used to display the object, for example, buildings. If the

visual object type is assigned to a storage bin, the height of the box is defined at the storage bin type level. If the visual object type is assigned to a packaging material, the height is defined at the packaging material level. Box storage bins cannot be used for yard operations, that is, storage of TUs.

○ Rectangle: This shape is used to define a storage bin for the TU storage, for example, a parking lane.Length and width are defined at the storage bin level. In addition, define the capacity (for example, in meter), and TU alignment (rotation angle, stacking) within the storage bins. Such a storage bin can be used, for example, for a single container slot, a straight rail track, or a parking lane.

○ Multi-Segment-Line: This shape is defined by multiple segments and can be used to represent a rail track or and parking area. If the end point of a segment is identical to the start point of the next segment, both are connected, for example, a track with multiple segments.

○ Compound: This shape is used to display objects like buildings with a floor plan unequal to a rectangle. A compound is defined by a closed polygon as floor plan and a height is defined at the storage bin type level. Compound storage bins cannot be used for yard operations.

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 37

○ Polygon: This shape is used to display a floor plan like a compound, however, only on a two-dimensional level. Polygon storage bins cannot be used for yard operations.

○ Collada: This shape is to indicate that a Collada model is used to represent an object. You have to maintain the Model field.

● Fill Color is the color that is used to fill the shape.● Border Color is the color of the border of the shape.● Highlight Color is the color while hovering over the object.● Selection Color is the color used for highlighting an object in visual yard when you click on it.

NoteYou have maintained the colors that you are using above. See Maintain Colors [page 35].

● Texture is the texture for your object and you can select from the ones that you have defined under Define Textures [page 36].

● Model defines the Collada objects. See Define Collada Model [page 36].● Loading Height Offset and Loading Length Offset are used to display an object on top of another object, for

example, a container on top of a truck.● Unit is the unit of measurement for height and length of an object, for example, half a meter above floor level

and two meters to the right in order to get a proper display on top of a truck.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Yard Cockpit Define Visual Object Type .

The Define Visual Object Type: Overview screen appears.2. Select the New Entries option.3. Select the Yard No.4. Enter the Visual Object Type, for example, BUILD for a building.

5. Enter the characteristics for the visual object type and save your entries.

3.6.5 Assign Visual Object Type to Packaging Material

Context

Use this procedure to assign a visual object type to the packaging material.

To display a transportation unit (TU) at the Visual Business Control scene, you have to assign a visual object type to the TU. As a TU is characterized by its packaging material, it is sufficient to assign a visual object type to the packaging material.

38 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Yard Cockpit Assign Visual Object Type to Packaging Material .

The Assign Visual Object Type to Packaging Material: Overview screen appears.2. Select New Entries.3. Select the Yard No.4. Select the Packaging Material.5. Select the Visual Object Type and save your entries.

3.6.6 Assign Visual Object Type to Storage Bin Type

Context

Use this procedure to create a mapping between a visual object type and its corresponding storage bin type. To display a storage bin at a visual business control scene, it must be assigned to a visual object type. As a storage bin is characterized by its type, it is sufficient to assign a visual object type to the storage bin type.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Yard Cockpit Assign Visual Object Type to Storage Bin Type .

The Assign Visual Object Type to Storage Bin Type: Overview screen appears.2. Select the New Entries option.3. Select the Yard No..4. Select the Stor. Bin Type to which you want to assign to the visual object type.5. Select the Visual Object Type.6. Select the Positioning Type of the transportation units within the storage bin. This is applicable for:

○ Horizontal storage bins, for example, rail track, parking lane○ Vertical storage bins, for example, container stack. For more information on vertical storage or stacking,

see Stacking of Transportation Units on Storage Bins [page 122].

By default, the Positioning Type is Unsorted. In this case, you cannot maintain the predecessor or successor while creating or confirming the yard task. During yard task confirmation, the TU that is moved to the storage bin is added at the end of the TU sequence.

You can select the Positioning Type as Sequence. In this case, you can maintain the predecessor or successor while creating or confirming the yard task. During yard task confirmation, the TU is inserted in the storage bin based on the predecessor or successor that you have maintained. If you do not maintain the predecessor or

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 39

successor, the TU that is moved to the storage bin is added at the end of the TU sequence. If you select this option, you can see the Sequence tab in the TU maintenance or display screen. Here, you can see the TUs that are preceding and succeeding the current TU on the same storage bin.

7. Enter the TU Alignment Angle and save your entries. TU alignment angle is the alignment angle of a transportation unit on a storage bin.

Next Steps

● Define Visual Object Type [page 37]● Yard Layout [page 41]

3.6.7 Define Visual Object Status Color Coding

You use this function to define the color in which the system should display the transportation unit on the yard cockpit based on the visual object status of the transportation unit.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Yard Cockpit Define Visual Object Status Color Coding .The Define Visual Object Status Color Coding screen appears.

2. Select New Entries.3. Select the yard number.4. Select the visual object status of the transportation unit.5. Select the color in which you want to display the TU on the yard cockpit.6. If there are more than one color maintained for a visual object status, you can set the priority for the system to

select the color for the TU. The system selects the color with the higher priority than the color defined in the customizing. If there are more than one visual object status with the same priority, the system selects the first entry.

7. Save your entries.

40 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

3.6.8 Define Yard Location Position

Context

Use this procedure to maintain the actual coordinates of a storage bin. These coordinates are required to display the storage bins appropriately on the yard cockpit. As an alternative to this manual activity, you can use the yard editor to define the yard location position.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Yard Cockpit Define Yard Location Position .

The Define Yard Location Position: Overview screen appears.2. Select the storage bin for which you want to maintain the location coordinates.3. Select Position Records.4. Select the New Entries option.5. Select the Visual Basic Mode. This can be either GeoMap View or Schematic View.6. Enter the Sequence Number. This defines the order in which objects are processed.7. Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates to define the location of the storage bin on the yard and save your entries.

3.7 Yard Layout

Use

Use this function to design the visual layout of a yard. The standard EWM functions to define the yard layout using the Yard Layout Editor [page 42] are:

● Create, Change and Display Storage Bins – Allows you to define the storage bins before you can draw them in the Yard Editor.

● Generate Storage Bins – Allows you to mass generate the storage bins.● Assign Warehouse Door to Yard Bin – Allows you to assign one door that is linked to a storage bin.● Assign Checkpoint to Yard Bin and SCU – Allows you to assign checkpoint to a storage bin.

More Information

For more information on storage bins, go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Extended Warehouse Management . Select a relevant release, for example, SAP

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 41

Extended Warehouse Management 9.3. Choose Application Help. Go to SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) Warehouse Structure Storage Bin .

3.7.1 Yard Layout Editor

Use

You can edit the yard layout using the yard layout editor. The tool to design the layout is based on SAP Visual Business (VB) using GeoMap layout.

Prerequisites

● Maintain the standard settings for SAP Visual Business in Customizing for Maintain Application Definitions under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver UI Technologies SAP Visual Business .In this Customizing activity, you define and assign geo-coding services, map products, map layer stacks and applications for SAP Visual Business. These settings are mandatory to operate SAP Visual Business.

● You have created the storage bins for your yard.

Features

Sections of the Screen

● Storage Bin Area – This is the left side of the screen. Here, you can view the storage bins with their storage types, storage sections and storage bin types.

● VB Yard Visualization Area – This is the right side of the screen. Here, you can see the VB visualization of storage bins with corresponding visual shapes.

Storage Bin Selection

You can select a storage bin on the left side of the screen.

● If a corresponding storage bin visual shape exists, the system highlights the storage bin in the VB area and displays a green traffic light for the storage bin in the storage bin area.

● If you have done all the required Customizing but you have not drawn the shape in the VB area, the traffic light for the storage bin in the storage bin area is yellow.

● If some Customizing is missing, the traffic light for the storage bin in the storage bin area is red.

Storage Bin Floor Plan Maintenance

● Storage bin without floor plan is one without an existing floor plan in the VB area. If you select a storage bin in the storage bin area without a floor plan, the storage bin is immediately in Creation mode.

42 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

● Storage bin with floor plan is one that has a visual shape in the VB area. To select a storage bin with floor plan, select a storage bin from the storage bin area or click the storage bin visual shape in the VB area. In this case, the floor plan is in Display mode.

Storage Bin Creation

The object shape type defined at the storage bin type level defines the object to be designed. The user interface guides and supports you to design the shape of the selected storage bin depending on the shape type. The system displays the new objects as defined in the corresponding visualization type.

● Box: The floor plan of a box is defined by three coordinates – the lower left corner, the upper left corner, and the upper right corner.

● Rectangle: A floor plan of a rectangle is designed analog to a box by three coordinates. The left corners define the start edge of the storage bin.

● Multi-segment: The width of multi-segment storage bins is defined at the storage bin type level to ensure a consistent visualization, for example, each rail track has the same width. Therefore, you can define the floor plan by selecting the start and end coordinates.

● Compound: To design a compound with a floor plan unequal to a rectangle, you have to define a closed polygon. Define the polygon points in a clockwise order.

● Polygon: To display a floor plan like a compound, however, only on a two-dimensional level, you use a polygon.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Yard layout Yard Layout Editor .The Yard Layout Editor screen appears.

2. Select the Settings button on the top left side of the screen to edit the following:○ Yard Number – You can change the yard number to view the cockpit for a different yard.○ Visual Business Visualization Mode – You can view the yard in a Schematic View or GeoMap view.○ Visual Yard Full Screen Mode indicator – Select this indicator to see the yard cockpit, that is, the right side

of the screen in full screen mode.○ Flatten Buildings indicator – Select this indicator to switch­off the 3-D mode.○ Display/Change Coordinates – Coordinates of bins marked with a green icon can be displayed or edited.

You can change coordinates and dimensions only in Edit mode. When you choose Edit, A new dialog screen opens for changing the coordinates (only the coordinates of the current VB mode are displayed). The Change Coordinates dialog displays details of the selected storage bin along with a list containing the currently defined coordinates for the respective VB mode. You can add or delete rows or amend the current coordinates. Box objects require exactly one coordinate, compound and curve objects require a minimum of two different coordinates and rectangle objects require exactly two different coordinates. The system checks these conditions when you confirm the dialog. A message is displayed in case the above conditions are violated.When the Change Coordinates pop-up is opened for a non-empty bin, the system displays a warning message informing you that the dimensions cannot be implicitly changed. If, however, the new coordinates would result in a change in the dimensions, the system displays an error message and the new coordinates are discarded.

○ Display/Change Dimensions - You can display and edit the dimensions of bins marked with a green icon. You can change the dimensions only in Edit mode. When you choose Edit, A new dialog screen opens for changing the dimensions. (only the dimensions of the current VB mode are displayed).

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 43

The Change Dimensions dialog contains details of the selected storage bin, the maximum dimensions as well as the currently defined dimensions, If no dimensions have been defined previously, the maximum possible dimensions are shown. Only dimensions of empty storage bins can be changed. The new dimensions can be larger than the predefined maximum values, however, in such a case, the system displays a warning message.For curved, rectangle, and compound objects, the length is defined through coordinates. Therefore, the length cannot be changed via the Dimensions dialog screen. If the defined coordinates imply a length that is larger than the maximum length, the system issues a warning message, but changes are still taken over to the existing bin data

3. Edit the yard, as required, and save your changes.

More Information

To view the yard that you have created here, go the yard cockpit. For more information on yard cockpit, see Launch Yard Cockpit [page 135].

3.8 Internet of Things

The SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services in SAP Yard Logistics is used to read messages from the sensor, store the messages in the SAP HANA Cloud Platform. Then the SAP Yard Logistics pulls the data from these messages.

The SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services consists of the following master data settings:

● Assign Transportation Unit to Device [page 44]● Maintain Connection Settings [page 45]● Maintain Internet of Things Settings [page 45]● Pull Data from IoT Cloud [page 52]● Send Message [page 53]

Prerequisite

If required, you have maintained the Business Add-In /SAPYL/IOT_MESSAGE_INBOUND to enhance the processing of inbound messages from SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things service. You can maintain this BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Processing of Inbound Messages under SAP Customizing Implementation GuideYard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics Integration Internet of Things .

3.8.1 Assign Transportation Unit to Device

When a transportation unit comes into the yard, you physically attach a device that is already present in the yard. You use this function to assign transportation unit to devices in the system for SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet

44 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

of Things services. You can also use this setting to record the information about a device already mounted to the incoming transportation unit.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Internet of Things Assign Transportation Unit to Device .2. Select the New Entries option.3. Select the Device Name. This is the key field.4. Enter the Transportation Unit. This indicates the transportation unit that the device is also mounted. All data

sent from this device is stored for this transportation unit.5. Save your entries.

3.8.2 Maintain Connection Settings

You use this function to define the connection endpoints to SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services.

Prerequisites

You have successfully set up the following:

● The RFC HTTP connection to SAP HANA Cloud Platform, IoT Device Management Service● The RFC HTTP connection to SAP HANA Cloud Platform, IoT Message Management Service● Created and assigned the system alias to the RFC destination for MMS service

3.8.3 Maintain Internet of Things Settings

You use this function for executing the following activities:

● Configure Message Types [page 45]● Configure Device Types [page 47]● Configure Devices [page 49]● Assign Device to Measurement Types [page 51]

3.8.3.1 Configure Message Types

You use this function to:

● Create Message Types [page 46]

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 45

● Delete Message Types [page 47]

3.8.3.1.1 Create Message Types

You create a message type, assign message fields to it and register the message type with SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services.

Context

Each message type defines a message format including message fields that can be sent or received by a device.

Example: A device can send the message whether the container is open or closed. The message can contain two fields, the sensor and the value. In that case, you would create a message type with the name ContainerDoor and would add the two fields to it.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Internet of Things Maintain Internet of Things Settings .2. From the Dialog Structure section, select the Message Types option.3. Select the New Entries button.4. Enter a Message Type name and Description for the message type.5. Select a message type and choose the Message Fields option.6. Select the New Entries button.7. Enter the field position, Field Name and select the Field Type.

NoteFor field type string, an optional settings field appears where you can set the maximum length of strings for the corresponding message field. The maximum length must be a number between 1 and 5,000; the default value is 255.

8. You can add additional fields and save your entries.9. Select the Message Types option once again and save your entries.10. Click the Register Message Type button to register the message type in Internet of Things. The system assigns

a message type ID generated in SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services.

Related Information

https://help.hana.ondemand.com/iot/frameset.htm?a7bf661819bc415d87bee5818e763fad.html

46 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

Delete Message Types [page 47]

3.8.3.1.2 Delete Message Types

You delete a message type and the assigned message fields to it by unregistering the message type with SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services.

Context

Message types can be deleted without restrictions. You cannot delete a message type as long as it is assigned to at least one device type.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Internet of Things Maintain Internet of Things Settings .2. From the Dialog Structure section, select the Message Types option.3. Select a message type and choose the Message Fields option.4. Select a row of the message field and choose the Delete option. Delete all the message fields for the message

type.5. Save your deletions.6. Select the Message Types option once again.7. Click the Unregister Message Type button to unregister the message type in Internet of Things. The system

deletes the message type ID generated in SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services.8. Select the Delete option to delete the message type entry.9. Save your deletions.

Related Information

Create Message Types [page 46]https://help.hana.ondemand.com/iot/frameset.htm?e59481e74d6b48ab9eab730555877ec7.html

3.8.3.2 Configure Device Types

You use this function to:

● Create Device Types [page 48]

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 47

● Delete Device Types [page 49]

3.8.3.2.1 Create Device Types

You create a device type, assign message types to it and register the device type with SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services.

Context

A device type specifies a group of devices that share the same specification. In the context of SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services, a device type is mainly specified by its supported message types (See Create Message Types [page 46]). Message types are assigned to device types using message type assignments. A message type assignment contains the message type name, the message direction, and an optional assignment name.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Internet of Things Maintain Internet of Things Settings .2. From the Dialog Structure section, select the Device Types option.3. Select the New Entries button.4. Enter a Device Type name and Description for the device type.5. Select a device type and choose the Message Types option.6. Select the New Entries button.7. Select a Message Type and select the Direction. Each message type can only be assigned once to a specific

device type.8. Select the Device Types option once again and save your entries.9. Click the Register Device Type button to register the device type in Internet of Things. The system assigns a

device type ID generated in SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services.

Related Information

Delete Device Types [page 49]https://help.hana.ondemand.com/iot/frameset.htm?5b3d7177333b4f3080779d1f5a31d649.html

48 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

3.8.3.2.2 Delete Device Types

You delete a device type and the assigned message types to it by unregistering the device type with SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services.

Context

Device types cannot be deleted if devices of this specific device type still exist. If a device type is deleted, all associated message types are also automatically deleted.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Internet of Things Maintain Internet of Things Settings .2. From the Dialog Structure section, select the Device Types option.3. Select a device type and choose the Message Types option.4. Select a row of the message type and choose the Delete option.5. Save your deletions.6. Select the Device Types option once again.7. Click the Unregister Device Type button to unregister the device type in Internet of Things. The system deletes

the device type ID generated in SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services.8. Select the Delete option to delete the device type entry.9. Save your deletions.

Related Information

Create Device Types [page 48]https://help.hana.ondemand.com/iot/frameset.htm?51ff583cf97641bab05d1bfeb782dfd8.html

3.8.3.3 Configure Devices

You use this function to:

● Create Devices [page 50]● Delete Devices [page 50]

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 49

3.8.3.3.1 Create Devices

You create a device, assign a device type to it and register the device with SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services.

Context

Registering a device for Internet of Things SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services always requires a device type. For information on how to create a device type, refer to section Create Device Types [page 48].

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Internet of Things Maintain Internet of Things Settings .2. From the Dialog Structure section, select the Devices option.3. Select the New Entries button.4. Enter a Device Name and Description for the device.5. Select a Device Type and save your entries.6. Click the Register Device button to register the device in Internet of Things. The system assigns a device token

generated in SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services.

Related Information

Delete Devices [page 50]https://help.hana.ondemand.com/iot/frameset.htm?89d3a1b8128a4875b579803d360e580c.html

3.8.3.3.2 Delete Devices

You delete a device type by unregistering the device with SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services.

Context

Devices can be deleted without restrictions.

50 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Internet of Things Maintain Internet of Things Settings .2. From the Dialog Structure section, select the Devices option.3. Click the Unregister Device button to unregister the device in Internet of Things. The system deletes the device

token generated in SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Internet of Things services.4. Select the Delete option to delete the device entry.5. Save your deletions.

Related Information

Create Devices [page 50]https://help.hana.ondemand.com/iot/frameset.htm?49eb45b17cd64e439c7501ddd139e9bb.html

3.8.3.4 Assign Device to Measurement Types

You use this function to map information coming from different devices based on the message type to actual TU record types under Measurements for Yard Logistics. The mapping can be precise to more generic depending on the messages received from devices.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Internet of Things Maintain Internet of Things Settings .2. From the Dialog Structure section, select the Assign to Measurement Types option.3. Select the New Entries option.4. Enter the yard number, as the TU record type for Measurements is relevant for a yard number.5. Enter the message type that is received from the device. The message type is assigned to the record type.6. In the case of a device with multiple fields, enter the Field Name and Field Value for each of the fields, for

example, in case of a multi-sensor device. Having the multiple fields allows you to have a detailed mapping between the field (sensor) of the device and the TU record type.

7. Enter the TU record type to which the system should direct the incoming message.8. Enter the Field with MeasVal. It that holds the value of the message, for example, Closed or Open depending on

the status of the container door.9. Save your entries.

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 51

3.8.4 Pull Data from IoT Cloud

You use this function to connect the Yard Logistics system to the SAP HANA Cloud Platform and fetch the data that is received within the given time frame from the device and to update the TU record types with the measurement values. This report is scheduled to run automatically.

Prerequisites

You have maintained the Internet of Things settings in the user interface under Master Data Internet of ThingsInternet of Things Settings .

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Internet of Things Pull Data from IoT Cloud .The Pull Device Data from HANA to IoT Service screen appears.

2. Select the yard number.3. Enter the threshold or the timeframe of the data that you want to fetch from the SAP HANA Cloud Platform.,

for example, 300 seconds.4. Execute the report.

The system fetches the data from the SAP HANA Could Platform that is received within the last, for example 300 seconds, processes this data and sends the corresponding measurements to the transportation unit. The system updates the TU record types with the measurement values.

Related Information

Maintain Internet of Things Settings [page 45]

52 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

3.8.5 Send Message

You use this function to simulate the messages from devices sent to SAP HANA Cloud Platform by sending them from the SAP Yard Logistics system. You use this feature to test your settings or to simulate a message sending device.

Prerequisites

You have maintained the Internet of Things settings in the user interface under Master Data Internet of ThingsInternet of Things Settings .

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Master Data Internet of Things Send Message .The Internet of Things: Send Message screen appears.

2. Select the Device Name.3. Enter the Message Type as more than one message type can be assigned to a device.4. Maintain the parameters, as required. The Field Name and Field Value should correspond to the fields that you

have maintained in Assign Device to Measurement Types [page 51].5. Execute the report.

The system sends the messages to the SAP HANA Cloud Platform. You can execute the report Pull Data from IoT Cloud [page 52] to fetch the data from the SAP HANA Cloud Platform and to update the TU record types with the measurement values.

3.9 Maintenance Tools

3.9.1 Check-Out Transportation Units (without Yard Order)

You use this function to check-out the transportation units that exist on the yard without a yard order. This functionality is intended for processes like scrapping a transportation unit. As there is no yard order involved, there is no communication to an external system. The report requires that all transportation units to be processed are located at a checkpoint.

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 53

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Settings Check-Out Transportation Units (without Yard Order) .The Check-Out Transportation Units screen appears.

2. Enter the following information on the selection screen.1. Yard Number2. Checkpoint – This is the departure checkpoint of a transportation unit in a yard.3. Transportation Unit – You can enter any number of transportation units that you want to check-out.4. Number of TUs per LUW – This is the number of TUs that the system processes per LUW. For better

performance, enter maximum number here. However, if even one TU is not successfully executed in an LUW, the system does not check-out any of the TUs.

5. Test Mode or Execution Mode3. Execute the report

The system displays a log of checked-out TUs.

3.9.2 Determine and Delete TU Objects With No SR Activity

Use

You use this report to determine all yard transportation units (TUs) that have no Shipping and Receiving Activity, that is, that they have never been checked-in with a yard order. You can run this report in test mode and execution mode.

NoteThis report should only be used in exceptional cases and not on a regular basis.

Features

Enter the following on the selection screen:

● Offset in Days – Enter the number of days that the TU creation date time lies before the current timestamp. The report selects only those TUs that are older than the offset days that you have entered.

● Test mode – Select this indicator if you do not want the report to delete the TUs.

This report determines the TUs that have no Shipping and Receiving Activity:

● In test mode, the report determines such TUs and lists them on the screen.● In execution mode, the report determines such TUs and deletes them from the system. The report also

creates a BAL log with all the TUs that have been deleted.

54 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

Activities

To access this report, from the user interface, go to Master Data Maintenance Tools Determine and Delete TU Objects With No SR Activity .

3.9.3 Execute Mass Activation of Yard Requests

Use

You can use this function to activate a number of yard requests automatically. The report can run in a background mode and in an online mode.

The report releases all yard requests that fit the selection criteria and are valid for the release action. For each activation, the report stores the dependent messages in the application log.

Prerequisites

For the background job, a variant with all mandatory fields are required.

Activities

To access this report, from the user interface, go to Master Data Maintenance Tools Execute Mass Activation of Yard Requests .

3.9.4 Upload and Create Transportation Units from csv File

Use

You use this function to upload transportation units (TU) data from *.csv file and to create TUs based on data in *.csv file on your local system.

Features

Enter the following on the selection screen:

SAP Yard LogisticsMaster Data C U S T O M E R 55

● Yard Number● Local File Name – Choose the directory, where *.csv file is stored● Test Mode – If you select this indicator, the report runs in a test mode. The report does not create any TU in the

system. The system gives a log of potential errors, which can occur during TU creation.● Execution Mode – If you select this indicator, the report creates TUs in the system. The system displays an ALV

List with a result of TUs created. You can select the Protocol option to display the application log with details of TUs created.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Settings Upload and Create Transportation Units .2. From here, you can upload TU data and create TUs.

Example

Following is a sample *.csv file:

TU Number Ext Checkpoint TU Type Means of Transport

Packaging Ma­terial

Start Date & Time

End Date & Time

DK_CN0_AD­HOC_7

INBW ACN0 CONTAINER CONTAINER 201612241200 201612241300

DK_TR0_AD­HOC_7

INBW ATR0 TRUCK TRUCK 201612241200 201612241300

NoteThe first line is the header. It is always skipped during the TU creation process. Order of columns must be the same as in the example above. Each column must be separated by a comma (,) as you have to enter the data into a *.csv file. The Start Date & Time and End Date & Time fields are optional. If you do not enter anything there, the system defaults the check-in date and time.

56 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Master Data

4 Planning

This component allows you to plan the operations for a yard. During the planning stage, you can receive some information from the customer or from the SAP Transportation Management (TM) based on the freight order. Furthermore, the planning can also be based on internal production processes as the yard could also be assigned for a plant. You enter the planning process in the system using a:

● Yard Request [page 57]● Yard Order [page 82]

4.1 Yard Request

Use

This function allows you to create, maintain and display a yard request from the user interface.

The purpose of a yard request is to identify the workload for the yard, for example, based on customer order, production order or planned incoming or outgoing transports. A yard request is in response to a request for some activities in the yard. Once all yard requests are represented in the system, you have an overview of the planned workload for your yard in a certain time frame.

A yard request is created during the planning phase in one of the following ways:

● Automatically via process integration, for example, from SAP Transport Management system (part of standard system) or a legacy system. (For more information, see Create Yard Request via Process Integration [page 63])

● Manually from the user interface. (For more information, see Create Yard Request Manually [page 63].)

Prerequisites

You have maintained the Order Type and assigned it to a yard warehouse number in Customizing for Define Order Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

Features

● You create a yard request for a combination of a yard number and an order type.● A yard request can be activated and transformed into a yard order.● You cannot edit a yard request once you release it.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 57

● The system automatically assigns a number to a yard request. This is based on the Customizing of number ranges for the yard requests of a yard.○ You can define the number ranges for the yard requests of a yard in Customizing for Define Number

Ranges for Yard Request under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master DataSetting up the Yard Define Number Ranges for Yard Request, Yard Order, Yard Task .

○ You can then assign the number range to a combination of a yard number and order type in Customizing for Assign Number Range Intervals to Yard Request under SAP Customizing Implementation GuideYard Logistics Master Data Setting up the Yard Define Number Ranges for Yard Request, Yard Order, Yard Task .

● Yard requests can be of the following types:○ Inbound yard requests – You create an inbound yard request, for example, when a loaded truck enters a

yard and gets unloaded there.○ Outbound yard requests – You create an outbound yard request, for example, when an empty truck loads

a container and leaves the yard.● Copy tab

You can use this function to make a copy of a yard request.○ The system adjusts the date and time to the current date and time.○ If the copied yard request does not contain the default yard task, the system adds it to the yard request.○ You can select the Template indicator to save this yard request as a template.

● Copy To <Inbound or Outbound> YR tabYou can use this function to copy an inbound yard request into a corresponding outbound yard request and vice-versa.○ This copy function copies all attributes of the yard request like arrival attributes to departure attributes

(and vice-versa), all items but does not copy the yard tasks.○ The linked (pair of inbound and outbound yard requests created using this copy function) yard requests

have references to each other to enable a quick switch between inbound yard request to outbound yard request and vice-versa. You do this is using the Switch To <Inbound or Outbound> YR tab.

○ The yard request copy function is possible only if the yard request is not yet released, that is, the yard request status is Active.

○ Once you have created a yard request using this copy function and you have released the yard request, you cannot copy an opposite yard order from the generated yard order document screen. You have to release the opposite yard request to generate the opposite yard order. This restriction avoids the creation of multiple yard orders for the same yard request.

○ After creating a yard request using this copy function, if you make changes in a yard request, you have to make the changes manually in the corresponding yard request. The system does not synchronize the two yard requests.

○ In the case where a yard request copy is created, that is, a yard request link exists, the yard order copy function is disabled. In this scenario, the yard order Switch To <Inbound or Outbound> YO function also works. This means that when the corresponding yard request is released, the yard order that is created has a reference to the linked yard order if it is also created by releasing the corresponding yard request.

● Switch To <Inbound or Outbound> YR tabIn the case of linked inbound and outbound yard requests, you use this switch function tab in the yard request to directly switch between inbound to outbound yard request and vice-versa. For example, from an inbound yard request screen, you can select the Switch To Outbound YR tab to open the corresponding outbound yard request.

● PrintWhen you click the Print button, you get the following options:

58 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

○ Print Immediately1. When you select this option, the Printing Options popup appears.2. Select the Action Definition.

NoteYou are provided with the following predefined Actions. You can copy the existing PPF action to create one of your own and extend it.○ YO document printing manually – You have to trigger manual printing of the yard order.○ YR document manual printing – You have to trigger manual printing of the yard request.

3. Select the Spool Control Data that you have maintained.The system sends the document to the spool for printing.

○ Print Preview1. When you select this option, the Printing Options popup appears.2. Select the Action Definition. You are provided with some predefined actions.

The system generates a file that you can save on your local machine or open directly.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Yard Planning Yard Request .2. From here, you can create, edit or display a yard request.

More Information

Sections of a Yard Request [page 59]

4.1.1 Sections of a Yard Request

● General Data○ Yard Document Characteristics:

○ The system displays the Order Type. You can select this when you are creating the yard request.○ The system displays the Direction of the yard request, that is, whether the transportation unit is

Inbound or Outbound. You can select this when you are creating the yard request.○ The Yard Request Lifecycle Status field changes automatically depending on the phase of the yard

request. The lifecycle statuses of a yard request can be as follows:○ Created – The Status of a yard request is Created when you create a yard request and also

when you save it.○ Activated – The Status of a yard request changes to Activated when you release a yard

request. The system creates a yard order.○ Completed – The Status of a yard request changes to Completed when the Status of the yard

order associated with this yard request changes to Completed.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 59

○ Blocked – Assume that two TUs of a yard request carry dangerous goods but the corresponding items have to be kept separated from each other with respect to dangerous goods Customizing. When you save the yard request, the system saves the document but the Status of the yard request changes to Blocked if the separation rules are not obeyed. The user interface displays a warning message. You have to make changes to the dangerous goods settings either in the user interface or in the Customizing to unblock the yard request.

○ Consistency Status - The Consistency Status of the yard request is Incomplete when the yard request has at least one mandatory field that does not have any valid value. For more information, see Create Yard Request via Process Integration [page 63].

○ If you want to save the yard request as a template, select the Template indicator. For more information on templates, see Yard Request / Yard Order Template [page 62].

○ Archiving Status - The Archiving Status of a yard request is Not Archived. When you run the preprocessing archiving report using transaction SARA, the Archiving Status changes to In Process.

○ External Document ID - This field is used for a potential external document ID, which is the trigger for the creation of the document that you see in SAP Yard Logistics. For example, for the SAP TM Integration, this field contains the freight order number. It is a read-only field.

○ Vehicle InformationThis information is not mandatory.○ Enter the Carrier number to identify the entity responsible for executing the transport approaching or

leaving the yard. The SCAC field uniquely identifies a carrier.○ Enter the Driver name.○ Enter the Language Key for the driver's language of communication.○ Enter the Telephone number of the driver.

○ DimensionsDimensions are a total of all the items and the system calculates it automatically once you create the items. (For more information, see Yard Request - Items [page 64].)

● Administrative DataThe system determines this information automatically depending on the user and the time of creation and change of the yard request.

● LocationsThe system reads the location data that you have maintained from the user interface under Master DataYard Layout Define Default Location for Yard Order/Yard Request . The system defaults the Arrival information for an inbound yard request and Departure information for an outbound yard request. You can overwrite this data. See Yard Layout [page 41].

● ItemsFor more information, see Yard Request - Items [page 64].

● TasksFor more information, see Yard Request - Tasks [page 75].

● Business PartnerFor more information, see Business Partner [page 80].

● Date/TimeFor more information, see Date and Time [page 79].

● ReferenceThis is the header reference for the yard request. For more information, see Reference [page 81].

● Yard Document FlowHere, you can view all the relevant documents associated with this yard request. You can see the relevant documents under Predecessor Business Documents and Successor Business Documents. For example, for a

60 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

yard request, under Successor Business Documents, you can see the yard order and yard tasks associated with this yard request. You can select the Business Document Number to go to the document directly from here.

● Change DocumentsYou can enter a time frame to see all the changes made to the yard request during that time period. If you do not enter any time interval, the system displays all changes at a glance.

● Output ManagementThis is based on the Post Processing Framework (PPF). When the Yard Request Lifecycle Status changes, the system executes the process in the background. The result of this background processing is displayed in the Output Management section.○ You can select an action in Output Management to see the details for the same.○ If an action is unsuccessful, you can Regenerate the action.○ You can manually generate a new action from here, for example, manual printing of the yard request.○ You can regenerate an action from here, for example, reprint the yard request.

4.1.2 Yard Request Overview

Use

You use this function to generate a list of yard requests that belong to your yard. You have an overview of the planned workload for your yard in a certain time frame. From the overview screen, you can:

● Create a new yard request manually. (For more information, see Create Yard Request Manually [page 63].)● Select a yard request to edit it● Select a yard request to display it in a new window● Select a yard request to make a copy of the same● Select a yard request to delete it● Select a yard request to release it● Select a yard request to export the content to a spreadsheet

You can also view the references maintained for the yard request from this overview screen. There is a column with the type of reference document under which you can see the document for the yard request. You can configure the types of reference documents that you would like the system to display on this screen, for example, freight orders, invoices. To configure this, maintain the reference document types in Customizing for Define Additional References for YR/YO Overview under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Yard Planning Yard Request Overview Yard Requests .The Yard Requests Overview List screen appears.

2. Select the Settings button on the top left side of the screen to maintain user­specific settings, for example, selecting your yard.The system generates a list of yard requests that belong to your yard.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 61

3. To find your yard request, select the Quick Criteria Maintenance option and enter your yard request number or a range of numbers.

4. Select a yard request to edit, display, copy, delete or release it.

More Information

SAP Personal Object Worklist Library (POWL)

Go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose Technology Platform SAP NetWeaver . Select a relevant release, for example, SAP NetWeaver 7.4. Choose Application Help. Look for SAP Personal Object Worklist Library.

4.1.3 Yard Request / Yard Order Template

You use this function create a yard request/yard order template. You can use this template to create similar yard requests/yard orders for frequently occurring incoming and outgoing transports, like a train that arrives every Monday with a similar makeup.

Features

● You can create a template in the following ways:○ Create a yard request/yard order and select the Template indicator.○ Copy an existing yard request/yard order or a yard request/yard order template and select the Template

indicator. In this case, the system does not create a default yard task for the copied yard request/yard order.

● You can convert a yard request with status as Created and a yard order with status as Planned to a template by selecting the Template indicator.

● Once you save a yard request/yard order as a template, you cannot deselect the Template indicator.● When you select the Template indicator on the yard request/yard order screen, you can see Template as a part

of the document header.● When you create a yard request/yard order, you get the option to select the template that you want to use to

create the yard request/yard order.● A yard document, which was set like a template, cannot be moved to the execution phase. That is, a template

yard request cannot be released and a template yard order cannot be checked-in for inbound or activated for outbound directions accordingly.

NoteIf you want to create a template document based on another document, which is already complete or active, then you can use the Copy function and then mark the newly-copied document as a template.

62 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

4.1.4 Create Yard Request via Process Integration

You use this function to create a yard request automatically via process integration, for example, from SAP Transport Management system (part of standard system) or a legacy system.

When you create a yard request automatically via process integration, you are not allowed to edit the yard request document with the following exceptions:

● Threshold for yard request items –You can create and delete the threshold entries for the yard request items.● Dock Appointment Scheduling for yard request items - If the transportation unit is configured for Dock

Appointment Scheduling, you can create and delete the entries.● Warehouse Visits for yard request items – You can create and delete the warehouse visit entries for the yard

request items.● Output Management – If there is an entry in this section, you can generate the PPF actions.

You can release the yard request even if the Consistency Status of the yard request is Incomplete. The Consistency Status of the yard request is Incomplete when the yard request has at least one mandatory field that does not have any value.

When you release the yard request, the system creates a corresponding yard order. If the Consistency Status of the yard request is Inconsistent, the Consistency Status of the corresponding yard order is also Inconsistent. You cannot, however, check-in or activate such a yard order. You can edit the yard order that is generated. Once you have entered the mandatory fields and the Consistency Status of the yard order is Consistent, you can check-in or activate the yard order.

4.1.5 Create Yard Request Manually

Context

Use this procedure to create a yard request manually from the user interface.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Yard Planning Yard Request Create Yard Request .

NoteYou can also create a yard request from the Yard Request Overview List screen. (For more information, see Yard Request Overview [page 61].)

The Yard <Yard Number>, Create Yard Request screen appears.2. Select the Settings option to enter the yard number for which you want to create a yard request.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 63

Note

You have maintained the Yard Number in Customizing for Define Yard Numbers under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Setting up the Yard .

3. Select the Order Type.

The Order Type can be a truck, rail, ship, and so on.

NoteYou have maintained the Order Type and assigned it to a yard warehouse number in Customizing for Define Order Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

4. Select the Direction of the yard request, that is, whether the transportation unit is Inbound or Outbound.

5. If you want to create a yard order using a template, select the Yard Order Template Number.6. The system proposes the planned start date and time. You can edit the same. Select the Continue option.

○ The Yard Request <Yard Number>, Create Yard Request screen appears.○ The Consistency Status of the yard request is Consistent. The system evaluates the Consistency Status

when you save the yard request document.○ If you are creating the yard request using a template, the system adjusts the date and time records. The

system does not copy the actual date and time from the template document.7. Enter the relevant information in the different sections. (For more information, see Sections of a Yard Request

[page 59].)8. Save the yard request.

The system automatically assigns a number to the yard request. This is due to the number range customizing. (For more information on number range, see Yard Request [page 57].)

9. From this screen, you can edit, delete or cancel the yard request if you have not released it.

NoteYou can release the yard request to create a yard order. Once you release the yard request, you cannot edit it.

4.1.6 Yard Request - Items

Use

This function enables you to create items and to structure the arriving or departing transportation unit (TU).

ExampleTrain items can be the locomotive and the railcars attached to it. Each railcar can contain one or more container. Each item has a TU type, for example, truck, locomotive, railcar, container.

64 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

● You can maintain the child to parent relationship between items.● You can assign an icon type to a TU type in Customizing. The system displays this icon against an item

associated with this TU type. Else, the system displays a default icon for the item.● The items can be of the following types:

○ Grouping ItemsGrouping items serve as a grouping object in the hierarchy of items. It does not physically exist in the yard. You can create a number of items and group them under a grouping item. You can then assign this grouping item to a yard task. It saves you from assigning individual items to a yard task. Grouping items serve as a logical handle to reference the grouped items. The group can be dissolved in the yard after check-in.To create a grouping item, you have to select the TU Type as one that has been defined for a group. You can enter the TU Group External ID in the Transportation Unit field. This TU Group External ID helps you to identify the TU group. It is not mandatory for you to enter this. If you do enter the external ID, then it should be unique in scope of a yard request.

○ Non-grouping ItemsThese are physical objects in the yard. Non-grouping items can be of the following types:○ Carrying items: Other items can be loaded on to these items. Mostly, such items are movable,

actively or passively, for example, trucks, trailers, locomotives, rail cars.○ Loading items: Items that can be loaded on top of other items, for example, containers. The most

complex case for yard request creation are piggyback transports. For example, trucks that enter a yard and then are loaded onto railcars. Here, the truck is a carrying item but is also a loading item when it is loaded onto the rail car.

For more information on Item Hierarchy, see Item Hierarchy [page 69].

Prerequisites

You have defined the TU types and how a TU type is used in yard processes in Customizing for Define Transportation Unit Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master DataSettings for Transportation Unit General Settings .

Features

You have to maintain the following information for an item:

● Item Details○ The system automatically assigns an Item Number. This is a mandatory field.○ Select the Transportation Unit Type and enter the Transportation Unit. Transportation Unit uniquely

identifies the TU. These are mandatory fields. (For more information, see Check Transportation Unit Number [page 70] and Check Transportation Unit Number of Railcars [page 72].)

○ Enter the Means of Transport, for example, truck, ship, rail and so on. This is a mandatory field.○ Enter the Packaging Material for the TU. The system automatically proposes data such as the allowed

weight and volume from the relevant product master record. This is a mandatory field.○ Enter the License Plate Number of the TU.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 65

○ Select the Country of Registration of the TU.

NoteThe fields that are a part of the master data of the TU, such as the Country of Registration and the License Plate Number, are propagated to the TU that is assigned to the yard request item. This happens when you save the yard request.

○ Additional External Identification is another external unique identifier for the TU, for example, RFID.○ The Transportation Unit Empty indicator is set if the TU is empty. This indicator is set automatically by the

system. If the TU has another TU loaded on it, the indicator is not set for the first TU. For example, a truck has a container in it, then the indicator is not set for the truck but may be set for the container. If the container has some content in it, the indicator is not be set for the container.

○ TU Control Flag - See Transportation Unit Control [page 118] and Yard Order - Items [page 90].○ The Dangerous Goods flag indicates whether the Content tab contains dangerous goods, that is, whether

the DG Regulation field has an entry. In the Content tab:○ If you enter the DG Regulation or the system determines it automatically, the system automatically

sets this indicator○ If the system determines the DG Regulation automatically, the system automatically sets this

indicator. The system can be setup to determine the DG Regulation automatically.○ If you do not enter or you remove the DG Regulation, the system does not set this indicator

○ Transportation Unit Cleaned indicator○ This indicator is unchecked if the TU assigned to the yard request item is not cleaned.○ This indicator is checked if the TU assigned to the yard request item is cleaned.

● DimensionsThe system automatically determines this based on the data from the packaging material. You can update the same. These dimensions are added to the Dimensions section of the General Data in the first part of the yard request.

● ContentThe content is the product inside the transportation unit (TU). You can select the product from those available in the system or you can enter the product.Dangerous GoodsYou can set the yard as equipped to handle dangerous goods and the related dangerous goods fields in Customizing for Define Yard Numbers under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard LogisticsMaster Data Setting up the Yard . Then, in the Content tab, you can enter the DG Regulation for the product. The other dangerous goods fields are populated as per your settings from the dangerous goods master data.If the TU contains dangerous good, it may need to be treated in a special manner, for example, separation check. If a TU contains two products, the system checks the first product of each TU to give a warning if you have maintained the DG Regulation and Class in the Customizing for Define Separation Keys for Dangerous Goods under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Dangerous Goods .For more information, see Dangerous Goods [page 73].

● StatusThis is the TU status of an item assigned to a yard request that is for display only. This is based on the EWM-TU. The different statuses are as follows:○ CHKI – When you check-in the yard order, the status of the item displays as CHKI and it is marked with the

check-in timestamp.

66 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

○ BLAC – When you Set General Block for a TU from the yard cockpit, the status of the item displays as BLAC and it is marked with timestamp of setting the general block. Now, you cannot confirm the yard task to which this item is assigned. You must unblock the TU to confirm the yard task.

○ CHKO – When you check-out the yard order, the status of the item displays as CHKO and it is marked with the check-out timestamp.

○ DD – When the TU is docked at the EWM-Door, the status of the item displays as DD and it is marked with the timestamp of docking at EWM-Door.

NoteYou can define your own aggregation rules depending on the existing statuses for the current item using the Business Add-in (BAdI) /SAPYL/ITEM_BL_STATUS in Customizing for BAdI: Yard Order Item Blocking Status under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics .

● Loading SchemeA loading scheme defines how a TU can be loaded with other TUs. A loading scheme is assigned to an item. When the user assigns a subitem to such an item, the system checks if such a TU can be loaded onto the higher level TU.In a yard request, for an Item, based on the TU Type that you enter, the system checks whether a loading scheme can be assigned to it. The system also checks whether the item is a carrying item or a loading item or both.○ Loading Layout section

If the item is a carrying item and if the loading scheme can be assigned to the TU, the fields Loading Scheme and Layout are activated. Once you select the Loading Scheme, it is mandatory to select the Layout. As a Loading Scheme can consist of up to two levels, you can define the layout of each level.

○ Positioning sectionIf the item is a loading item, and you have entered the Loading Scheme and Layout for the parent item, you can enter the Position and Level for the TU under the Positioning section.If the item is a carrying item and a loading item, you can enter the carrying details under the Loading Layout section and the loading details under the Positioning section.

Note

○ You have defined the loading scheme in Customizing for Define Loading Scheme under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation UnitLoading and Stacking .

○ You have assigned a loading scheme to a TU type in Customizing for Define Transportation Unit Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit General Settings .

● ThresholdThe limits of a threshold are used to validate TU measurements. If the TU measurement is not within the threshold limits, the system raises an alert (as defined in the threshold). You can maintain the threshold record with the values for a yard request.When you release the yard request, the threshold records are copied to the corresponding yard order. For more information, see the Threshold section in Yard Order - Items [page 90].

● Reference sectionThis is the item reference for the yard request. For more information, see Reference [page 81].

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 67

● Dock Appointment SchedulingYou can create one or multiple appointments manually for an item. When you save the yard request, the system assigns an appointment number to the appointment. You can select the appointment number and go the appointment document. Here, you can plan the time slot for the appointment. See Dock Appointment Scheduling [page 168] and Appointment Management.

● Warehouse VisitsMaintain this section so that the system can send notifications to different EWM warehouses that are maintained within different EWM business systems. See Integration to SAP EWM [page 160].

● Classification DataHere, you maintain the classification data for TUs. This is used during TU determination.○ You are provided with the standard classification tables, /SAPYL/YO_ITEM and /SAPYL/YARD_TU, and

the standard class type, CTU.○ You have defined the characteristics for the standard class type CTU. To do so, from the user interface, go

to Master Data Classification Maintain Characteristics (or transaction CT04). See http://help.sap.com/saphelp_scm41/helpdata/en/bc/a57767d78a1b4db5941aa10351524f/frameset.htm.

○ You have defined the classes for the standard class type CTU. To do so, from the user interface, go to Master Data Classification Maintain Classes (or transaction CL02). See http://help.sap.com/

saphelp_scm41/helpdata/en/d2/f63349ccacef4594b7cad2cdb00adb/frameset.htm.○ On the yard request user interface, select the item to maintain the classification data for the item.○ If you do not enter the TU for an item, you can maintain the classification data for the yard request item.

You can edit these values.○ When you save a TU from a yard request item, the characteristics of the yard request item are copied to

the characteristics of the TU. This is valid only if the TU is used in only one yard request document.○ If the TU is used in multiple yard requests at the same time, the characteristics cannot be maintained in

the yard request item and are not copied to the TU.○ When the yard request item is deleted, all classification data that belongs to this yard request item is also

deleted.○ Once you enter a TU:

○ If the TU exists in the system, the classification data is defaulted here. You cannot edit the values if the TU is used in several yard order documents.

○ Maintain Yard Transportation Unit [page 139].○ If you delete the TU assigned to an item of a yard request, the characteristic values of the yard request

item will be available for input.If the TU does not exist in the system, you can enter the classification data and save your entries. When the yard request document is active, you can change the characteristic values from the TU document. See

○ All the mandatory characteristics should have a value if the characteristic belongs to the TU. Else, you cannot save the TU.

Activities

To create an item and a subitem:

1. Go to the yard request.2. Select the Items option.

3. Select New Item .

68 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

4. Enter the relevant information for the item.5. Create a subitem for an item, if required. See Item Hierarchy [page 69]. To create a subitem:

6. Select an item. Then choose New Subitem .7. Enter the relevant information for the subitem and save your entries.

You can execute the following functions for a yard request item:

● Copy an item:1. Select the item that you want to copy.2. Select the Copy button.

If the TU does not exist in the system, you canThe system creates a duplicate line copying the information from the selected item. The new item is created on the same hierarchy level as the selected item.

● Delete an item:1. Select the item that you want to delete.2. Select the Delete button.

The system deletes the item and all the child items.● TU Details

If a TU is assigned to an item, you can select this option to view the TU document. This option is disabled when there is no TU assigned to an item or when the Yard Request Lifecycle Status is Created.

4.1.6.1 Item Hierarchy

Use

The items can be of the following types:

● Grouping ItemsGrouping items serve as a grouping object in the hierarchy of items. It does not physically exist in the yard. You can create a number of items and group them under a grouping item. You can then assign this grouping item to a yard task. It saves you from assigning individual items to a yard task. Grouping items serve as a logical handle to reference the grouped items. The group can be dissolved in the yard after check-in.To create a grouping item, you have to select the TU Type as one that has been defined for a group. You can enter the TU Group External ID in the Transportation Unit field. This TU Group External ID helps you to identify the TU group. It is not mandatory for you to enter this. If you do enter the external ID, then it should be unique in scope of a yard order.

● Non-grouping ItemsThese are physical objects in the yard. Non-grouping items can be of the following types:○ Carrying items: Other items can be loaded on to these items. Mostly, such items are movable, actively or

passively, for example, trucks, trailers, locomotives, rail cars.○ Loading items: Items that can be loaded on top of other items, for example, containers. The most

complex case for yard order creation are piggyback transports. For example, trucks that enter a yard and then are loaded onto railcars. Here, the truck is a carrying item but is also a loading item when it is loaded onto the rail car.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 69

Prerequisites

● You have indicated the TU type associated with this item as a Grouping item or a Carrying item in Customizing for Define Transportation Unit Types under Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation UnitGeneral Settings .

● You have maintained the parent child relationship in the Customizing for Maintain Transportation Unit Loading Hierarchy under Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit Loading and Stacking

Features

● Transportation units that cannot be moved without any carrying transportation unit should not be created as a top-level item in a yard request or a yard order.

● Top-level items can be grouping items or carrying items.● Below a grouping item, all kind of subitems (grouping and non-grouping) can be defined as sub items.● It is not possible to create a loading subitem that has no carrying ancestor. This means when creating a

loading subitem that is not at the same time a carrying item, the system checks that going up the hierarchy, there is at least one hierarchy item that is a carrying item.

● It is not possible to create a non-loading item below a carrying item. Thus, the system checks that for any non-grouping subitem that has a non-grouping ancestor item, the subitem can be loaded on top of the item. For this check, the system checks the TU Loading Hierarchy that you have maintained in the Customizing.

● If a carrying item has a loading scheme definition, including the definition of corresponding layouts (currently the system has a limit of two layouts for two levels), then the system checks the number of subitems against the number of slots in the defined layouts. The number of subitems have to be less or equal to the number of slots. In addition, the system takes the capacity of the loading scheme, according to the length of a slot, into account. An item can only be loaded onto a slot that provides sufficient length.

● You cannot edit an outbound yard request or yard order item if open yard tasks with status Planned, Active or In Process exist for the document.

● If a yard task is assigned to an item and you change the TU Number for this item, the system automatically updates the dependent TU data for the assigned yard tasks.

4.1.6.2 Check Transportation Unit Number of Containers

Use

This function checks the transportation unit (TU) number of containers for a yard request or a yard order.

Features

For the containers, it is very important that the TU number corresponds to certain rules. This is based on ISO 6346, which is an international standard covering the coding, identification and marking of intermodal (shipping)

70 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

containers used within containerized intermodal freight transport. Such code has to be registered at the Bureau International des Conteneurs in Paris to ensure uniqueness worldwide. This standard coding consists of the following parts:

● Owner CodeThe owner code consists of three capital letters to indicate the owner or principal operator of the container. You define it as Bureau International des Containers et du Transport Intermodal (BIC) code in Customizing.

● Equipment Category IdentifierThe system supports the following capital letters:○ U – For all freight containers○ J – For all detachable freight containers○ Z – For all trailers and chassis

● Serial NumberThe serial number consists of 6 numeric digits, assigned by the owner or operator, uniquely identifying the container within that owner/operator’s fleet. The system determines this based on an algorithm specified in ISO 6346. You can maintain the settings for this algorithm in the system.

● Check DigitThe check digit consists of one numeric digit providing a means of validating the recording and transmission accuracies of the owner code and serial number. The system determines this based on an algorithm specified in ISO 6346. You can maintain the settings for this algorithm in the system.

If for a TU type, you have maintained the settings for a check, the system carries out the checks for the TU number and gives an error if the TU number does not comply with the checks.

NoteFor a TU type, if you have not defined a check routine in the Customizing, the system does not execute any check.

Activities

● The system provides standard settings for the TU number check for a container.You can define the Bureau International des Containers et du Transport Intermodal (BIC) code in Customizing for Define Container Number Owner Codes under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard LogisticsMaster Data Settings for Transportation Unit Transportation Unit Validation Container .

● If you do not want the system to check the TU number of a TU type as per the standard rules, you can define your own rules via classes and methods.You can define the classes and methods for a TU type in Customizing for Define Classes and Methods for Checking TU Number under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master DataSettings for Transportation Unit Transportation Unit Validation General .

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 71

4.1.6.3 Check Transportation Unit Number of Railcars

Use

This function checks the transportation unit (TU) number of railcars for a yard request or a yard order.

Features

● For the rail industry in Europe, it is very important that the TU number corresponds to certain rules. This is based on the UIC Code of Practice 438-3, Identification marking for tractive stock. A complete number comprises 12 digits.○ Digits 1–2

This is the type code.○ Digits 3–4

This is the country of origin.○ Digits 5–11

This is defined by the country concerned.○ Digits 12

This is the check digit.The check digit consists of one numeric digit providing a means of validating the recording and transmission accuracies of the owner code and serial number. The system determines this based on an algorithm specified in ISO 6346. You can maintain the settings for this algorithm in the system.

○ Owner's CodeThis is the abbreviation for the country of origin and the owner of the vehicle.

If for a TU type, you have maintained the settings for a check, the system carries out the checks for the TU number and gives an error if the TU number does not comply with the checks.

NoteFor a railcar, if you have not defined a check routine in the Customizing, the system does not execute any check.

Activities

The system provides standard settings for the TU number check for a railcar as follows:

● You can define the code for each type of railway vehicle in Customizing for Define Types of Railway Vehicles under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit Transportation Unit Validation Rail .

● You can define the Class Number for railway vehicles in Customizing for Define Class Number for Railway Vehicles under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit Transportation Unit Validation Rail .

72 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

● You can define the country code for railcars in case of certain countries in Customizing for Define Country Code for Railcars under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit Transportation Unit Validation Rail .

If you do not want the system to check the TU number of a TU type as per the standard rules, you can define your own rules via classes and methods using general interface /SAPYL/IF_TU_EXT_NO_CHECK.

You can define the classes and methods for a TU type in Customizing for Define Classes and Methods for Checking TU Number under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit Transportation Unit Validation General .

4.1.6.4 Dangerous Goods

Use

Use this process to maintain the settings for dangerous goods. If the transportation unit (TU) contains dangerous good, it may need to be separated from other TUs of the same yard request or yard order.

NoteIf a TU contains two products, the system checks the first product of each TU to give a warning if you have maintained an entry in the Master Data for Assign Separation Keys to Product Master Data under Master Data

Dangerous Goods . See Dangerous Goods - Assign Separation Keys to Product Master Data [page 25].

You can enter the product as a dangerous good for a yard request or a yard order.

● In the case of a yard request, if two TUs have to be kept separated from each other, when you save the yard request:○ The system saves the yard request○ The Status of the yard request changes to Blocked.○ The user interface displays a warning message.

You have to make changes to the dangerous goods settings either in the user interface or in the Customizing to unblock the yard request.

● In the case of a yard order, if two TUs have to be kept separated from each other, when you save the yard order, you get an error message and the system does not save the yard order.You have to make changes to the dangerous goods settings either in the user interface or in the Customizing to save the yard order.

Process

To maintain dangerous goods in the system, in Customizing for Define Yard Numbers under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Setting up the Yard , maintain the following settings:

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 73

● Dangerous Goods – If you select Yes here, it indicates that the yard is equipped to handle dangerous goods. Then, in the Content tab, you can enter the DG Regulation for the product. The other dangerous goods fields are populated as per your settings.If you select Yes here, the system calls the BAdI: Dangerous Goods Checks During Check-In/Check-Out (BAdI /SAPYL/DG_CHECK_CICO) for dangerous goods checks during check-in/check-out of yard order. You can set the rules in the BAdI such that the system can reject the check-in and check-out of the yard order and can set the status of the yard order to Blocked. You can maintain this BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Dangerous Goods Checks During Check-In/Check-Out under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Dangerous Goods .

● DG Data Source - Determines the dangerous goods data origin for the yard. This affects the product of an item in a yard order. You have the following options:○ External System - The dangerous goods master data is stored in the business object yard order. In the yard

order item Content tab, the dangerous goods fields are disabled for input. Once you check-in the yard order, the data is stored in the business object of the transportation unit.

○ EH&S - The dangerous goods master data is stored in the dangerous goods master (transactions /SEHS/DGD03, /SEHS/HMD). In the yard order item Content tab, the dangerous goods fields are disabled for input. Once you check-in the yard order, you can see this data from the overview transaction of the transportation unit. It is automatically filled from the dangerous goods master data.The system also validates the existence of EH&S master data for the combination of product and regulation.

○ Manually Maintained - The dangerous goods master data is stored in the business object yard order. In the yard order item Content tab, the dangerous goods fields are enabled for input. Once you check-in the yard order, the data is stored in the business object of the transportation unit.

NoteYou are provided with the following Business Add-Ins to redetermine dangerous goods data:○ BAdI: Dangerous Goods Data Redetermination for TU (/SAPYL/BADI_DG_DETERMINE_TU) - This BAdI

is used to redetermine dangerous goods data for a transportation unit, that is, the fields for dangerous goods are filled with values and you want to change them.

○ BAdI: Dangerous Goods Data Redetermination for Yard Order (/SAPYL/BADI_DG_DETERMINE_YO) - This BAdI is used to redetermine dangerous goods data for a yard order item, that is, the fields for dangerous goods are filled with values and you want to change them.

You can implement these BAdIs in Customizing under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Dangerous Goods .

● DG Check - Determines whether the dangerous goods checks are applicable for the yard number. The system checks whether the checks should be applied to the product and the yard order when you save or enter some data in dangerous goods fields.○ No Check - The system does not execute any check.○ Separation Key Check - This option switches on checks based on separation keys for the products.

Customizing required are:

○ Assign Separation Keys to Product Master Data [page 25] - From the user interface, go to Master Data Dangerous Goods Assign Separation Keys to Product Master Data .

○ Define Separation Keys for Dangerous Goods under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Dangerous Goods .

74 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

Separation keys are defined for Dangerous Goods Regulation. For each Dangerous Goods Regulation, you can assign a separation key. For each separation key, you assign a Dangerous Goods Class. The class is a standard parameter and every dangerous good has a class associated with it.

○ Define Separation Check Rules for Dangerous Goods under SAP Customizing Implementation GuideYard Logistics Master Data Settings for Dangerous Goods .

Here, you assign the two separation keys and define whether the products associated with the two separation keys should be allowed or denied together. You can also define a check rule if you are not sure whether they should be allowed or denied together. In this case, you assign a Check Rule ID.

○ You can assign a Dangerous Good Check Rule Implementation Class to the Check Rule ID in Customizing for Assign Check Rule Implementation Class to Check Rule ID under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Dangerous Goods .You assign a Check Rule Implementation Class to the Check Rule ID. You can define your own rule in the class to determine whether the products associated with the two separation keys should be allowed or denied together.

NoteYou are not required to maintain a Check Rule ID if the default implementation is used.

Example

You are running a rail yard. You have a train that has a container carrying some toxic material and there is a container carrying some food product. You may not like to have the container carrying the toxic material close to the container carrying food product. Hence, the system has to carry out some checks to let you know that these two containers cannot be kept close to each other.

More Information

● Yard Request - Items [page 64]● Yard Order - Items [page 90]● Yard Task - Items [page 123]

4.1.7 Yard Request - Tasks

Use

This function allows you to create, maintain and display a yard task from a yard request. Yard tasks are descriptions of activities that must be done for items. They are activities that model all kinds of services on the yard like unloading, moving a transportation unit (TU) to a storage place, cleaning a TU, repairing a TU. Yard tasks are the key entities for planning and execution.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 75

After you create a yard request, you create yard tasks and assign items to the task. (For more information, see Yard Request - Items [page 64].)

Features

● When you create a yard request, the system checks whether the default tasks are defined and if they are, then the system creates these tasks. The tasks may be different for inbound and outbound yard requests. You can create default tasks only for movement and non-movement activities and not for loading activities. You can delete or edit these tasks.

NoteYou maintain the default tasks to be created in inbound and outbound yard requests in Customizing for Define Default Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

● You can assign items to the yard tasks. To do so, select the item or grouping item and the yard task to which you want to assign the item. Choose the Assign option.

● You can maintain a setting that controls whether the yard request items are automatically assigned to the default tasks or not. If you make this setting, the system always assigns all the items. You can make this setting in Customizing activity Define Default Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation GuideYard Logistics Yard Tasks . Select the Item Assignment indicator.

● You can create, edit, delete a yard task from the Tasks tab of a yard request only when the Status of the yard request is Created.

● You can delete yard tasks. To do so, select a yard task and choose the Delete option.● You can copy an existing yard task. To do so, select a yard task and choose the Copy option. If there are items

assigned to the yard task that you are copying, the system assigns the same items to the copied yard task.● Sections of a yard task

○ General○ Activity Type

Yard tasks are represented by Activity Types. It is mandatory to assign an Activity Type to a yard task.

Note

You have maintained the Activity Types in Customizing for Define Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

○ Activity CategoryActivity Category defines one of the possible scenarios of yard task execution.○ Activity Category can be of the following types:

○ Movement○ Non-Movement○ Loading/Unloading

○ The system determines the Activity Category automatically once you enter the Activity Type.

76 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

NoteYou have maintained the Activity Category in Customizing for Define Activity Types under

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

○ Activity Category influences the yard request item input behavior. The system determines the scenario that is executed based on the value of this field.

○ Cross-docking is not allowed in the case of Non-Movement activity category.○ Status○ Immediate Confirmation indicator

Once you activate the yard task, the system automatically confirms the yard task. You do not have to select the Start and Confirm button.

○ Yard Task QueueThe queue is one of the ways to manage the assignment of yard tasks to the user who is working with the yard task mobile user interface. The yard task is assigned to the queue either manually or automatically by the system.○ Manual assignment – You can enter the Yard Task Queue value manually in the yard task.○ Automatic determination of queue – The system determines the queue when you save the yard

task.○ Automatic determination of queue runs only for yard tasks that do not have any queue

assigned to them manually.○ Automatic determination of queue is based on the Activity Type, Source Storage Type and the

Destination Storage Type of the yard task. For more information, see Maintain Queue Determination [page 31].

○ Handling ResourceYou can manually enter the handling resource for a yard task. In this case, the system assigns this yard task to only this handling resource in the mobile user interface.

○ Business PartnerYou can assign a business partner for the yard task so that the system can execute the coordination and billing processes.

○ Execution (Planned)○ Planned Start Date

This is the date on which the task is planned to start. The system defaults the date that you have entered while creating the yard request. You can edit the same. It is mandatory to enter the Planned Start Date.

○ Planned Start TimeThe system defaults the time that you have entered while creating the yard request. You can edit the same. This is the time at which the task is planned to start. The system defaults the same time for all the tasks. Since you cannot execute all the tasks at the same time, change the time for the subsequent tasks. It is mandatory to enter the Planned Start Time.

○ Duration PlannedThe Duration Planned is proposed by the system but you can overwrite it.

NoteIf you are creating the yard request using a template, the system copies the yard tasks and then adjusts the planned execution date and time for those yard tasks where the planned date and time is in the past considering the yard task order and the duration between them.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 77

○ Execution (Actual)○ Actual Start Date

This is the actual date on which the task was executed. The system determines the Actual Start Date.○ Actual Start Time

This is the actual time at which the task was executed. The system determines the Actual Start Time.○ Duration Actual

This is the actual duration of the task. The system determines the Duration Actual○ Yard Order Number

A yard task can have reference to only one yard order with the exception of a cross docking yard task.○ Cross Docking

In the case of cross docking, you enter the Destination Yard Order Number. Only outbound yard orders are allowed as destination yard order numbers.

○ SourceThis is the source location of the yard task.○ Can be entered manually. The system proposes the actual location of the first item in the yard.○ It may happen that a yard task that has to be activated has no source location maintained for it. In

this case, during activation of the yard task, the system automatically assigns the actual location of the yard transportation unit assigned to the first yard task item as the source location.

○ In the case of an inbound yard request, the system defaults the inbound checkpoint of the yard order as the Source. This happens only if you have maintained the Movement Direction for the Activity Type as Check-in Movement in Customizing for Define Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

○ In the case of an outbound yard request, the system determines the source from the departure storage bin if you have maintained the Movement Direction for the Activity Type as Check-out Movement.

○ DestinationThis is the destination location of the yard task.○ In the case of an outbound yard request, the system defaults the Destination Location of the yard

order from the yard request outbound checkpoint if you have maintained the Movement Direction for the Activity Type as Check-out Movement.

○ In the case of an inbound yard request, the system determines the destination from the arrival storage bin if the you have maintained the Movement Direction for the Activity Type as Check-in Movement.

○ If you have indicated the Activity Type as relevant for subsystem, the Destination Location is determined from the subsystem.

○ If you have indicated the Activity Type as relevant for automatic destination location determination, the system determines the Destination Location based on the Customizing settings.

Note○ By default, here one of the subsystems is the EWM system that is maintained in the warehouse

visit.○ You have maintained the Activity Type as relevant for subsystem or destination location

determination, in Customizing for Define Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

78 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

The location (storage bin type) should be compatible with the TU type. When you save the yard task, the system checks for this compatibility.

NoteYou have maintained the compatibility between the storage bin type and the transportation unit (TU) type in Customizing for Maintain Compatibility of TU Type and Storage Bin Type under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks Location Determination .

○ Predecessor and SuccessorIf you select the Positioning Type as Sequence (see Assign Visual Object Type to Storage Bin Type [page 39]), you can maintain the predecessor or successor while creating or confirming the yard task. During yard task activation, the system validates the correctness of the predecessor and successor. During yard task confirmation, the TU is inserted in the storage bin based on the predecessor or successor that you have maintained. If you do not maintain the predecessor or successor, the TU that is moved to the storage bin is added at the end of the TU sequence.

4.1.8 Date and Time

Use

This function enables you to plan the yard processes associated with a yard request or a yard order by entering the start and end date and time for the yard process.

● In the case of an inbound yard request or an inbound yard order, you enter only the Arrival date and time record type for the yard process.

● In the case of an outbound yard request or an outbound yard order, you enter only the Departure date and time record type for the yard process.

NoteWhen you create a yard request or a yard order, the system automatically creates a date and time record with the current date and time as the start and end date and time.

● In the case of an inbound yard request/yard order with an item that is dock appointment scheduling relevant, the planned arrival at checkpoint date/time determined in the appointment is taken over into the yard request/order header Date and Time tab.

The time zone is that of the yard number.

Prerequisites

You have defined the date and time record types in Customizing for Define Date and Time Record Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order . You are provided with

some default record types. You can create your own record types.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 79

Activities

To enter the date and time for a yard activity:

1. Go to the yard request or yard order.2. Select the Date/Time option.3. Select Create.4. Select the Date/Time Record Type.5. Enter the start and end date and time, and save your entries.

To copy a date/time for a record type:

1. Select the row that you want to copy.2. Select the Copy button.

Another row of copied date/time is added to the list.

To delete a date/time for a record type:

1. Select the row that you want to delete.2. Select the Delete button.

The row of date/time is deleted from the list.

4.1.9 Business Partner

Use

This function enables you to maintain the business partners and business partner roles for the yard request and yard order.

You must store the business partner information related to the yard request or yard order so that the coordination and billing processes can be executed. Examples of business partner roles are ordering party, bill-to party, requester.

Prerequisites

You have defined the business partner roles for a combination of yard number and order type in Customizing for Define Business Partner Roles under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

80 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

Activities

To add a business partner and business partner role:

1. Go to the yard request or yard order.2. Select the Business Partner option.3. Select the Create button.4. Select the Business Partner Role.5. Select the Business Partner and save your entries.

The system defaults all the relevant information of the business partner on the screen.

To copy a business partner:

1. Select the business partner that you want to copy.2. Select the Copy button.

Another row of copied business partner is added to the list of business partners.

To delete a business partner:

1. Select the business partner that you want to delete.2. Select the Delete button.

The business partner is deleted from list of business partners.

4.1.10 Reference

Use

This function enables you to enter the documents that are related to the yard request or the yard order header and items. This can be a customer­specific document or any other document, for example, Freight Order, Requestor Reference ID, Contract Number.

● You can define reference types for the yard request header and items.● You can map external documents to yard request header and item reference documents● The system automatically adds reference documents to the yard request header when the document is

coming into the system via an interface, for example, from SAP Transportation Management.● You can also enter reference documents manually.● If you create a yard order by releasing a yard request, the yard order will have the same reference documents

as the yard request.

Prerequisites

● You have defined the header reference document types for the yard request or yard order in Customizing for Define Reference Document Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order . You are provided with some default reference types. You can create your own reference types.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 81

● You have defined the item reference document types for the yard request or yard order in Customizing for Define Reference Document Item Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard LogisticsYard Request and Yard Order . You are provided with some default item reference types. You can create your own item reference types.

● You have assigned the header reference document types to the order type in Customizing for Assign Reference Types to Order Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

● You have assigned the header and item reference types to the TU type in Customizing for Assign Reference Types to TU Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

● You have mapped the external reference document types to the header reference document types for the yard request in Customizing for Map External Reference Documents to YR Header Reference Documents under

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Integration Integration to SAP Transportation Management . This is valid only for yard requests.

● You have mapped the external reference document types to the item reference document types for the yard request in Customizing for Map External Reference Documents to YR Item Reference Documents under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Integration Integration to SAP Transportation Management .

4.2 Yard Order

Use

This function allows you to create, maintain and display a yard order. A yard order represents the workload to be executed within a certain time period based on the planning from the yard requests.

You can create a yard order in one of the following ways:

● Activate a yard request to transform it into a yard order. You can activate a yard request automatically or manually.

● Create a yard order manually from the user interface

Prerequisites

You have maintained the Order Type and assigned it to a yard number in Customizing for Define Order Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

82 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

Features

● You create a yard order for a combination of a yard number and an order type.● All the global function buttons of a yard order, for example, Start Processing, Complete, Check-in, Check-out,

Reverse Check-In/Check-Out, Activate, are disabled in the edit mode. Go to the display mode to enable these buttons.

● The system automatically assigns a number to a yard order. This is due to Customizing of number ranges for the yard orders.○ You can define the number ranges for the yard orders of a yard in Customizing for Define Number Ranges

for Yard Order under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Setting up the Yard Define Number Ranges for Yard Request, Yard Order, Yard Task .

○ You can then assign the number range to a combination of a yard number and order type in Customizing for Assign Number Range Intervals to Yard Order under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Setting up the Yard Define Number Ranges for Yard Request, Yard Order, Yard Task .

● Yard orders can be of the following types:○ Inbound yard orders – Inbound yard orders can only be checked-in and cannot be checked-out. It is

completed once you select the Complete option on the yard order. You create an inbound yard order, for example, when a loaded truck enters a yard and gets unloaded.

○ Outbound yard orders – Outbound yard orders can only be checked-out and cannot be checked-in. It is activated once you select the Activate option on the yard order. You create an outbound yard order, for example, to load a container onto a truck and then both leave the yard.

Note○ You can change the items of an inbound yard order after check-in if the status of the yard order is

Active.○ You can change the items of an outbound yard order, for example, remove the existing TU, add an

additional TU, change the TU attributes.○ A TU can be assigned to an inbound and an outbound yard order item simultaneously but only one

yard order can have the TU control.○ The same TU can be assigned to multiple outbound yard orders, which are in status Planned.

However, a TU can exist only in one active TU at any point in time. To enable this, during activation of a yard order, the system validates that the TU does not exist in any other active outbound yard order of the same yard.. If this fails, the system gives an error and the activation of the yard order fails. For more information on TU control, see Transportation Unit Control [page 118]

For more information on check-in/check-out, see Check-In and Check-Out a Yard Order [page 109].● Copy tab

You can use this function to make a copy of a yard order.○ The system adjusts the date and time to the current date and time.○ If the copied yard order does not contain the default yard task, the system adds it to the yard order.○ You can select the Template indicator to save this yard order as a template.

● Copy To <Inbound or Outbound> YO tabYou can use this function to copy an inbound yard order into a corresponding outbound yard order and vice-versa.○ This copy function copies all attributes of the yard order like arrival attributes to departure attributes (and

vice-versa), all items but does not copy the yard tasks.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 83

○ The linked (pair of inbound and outbound yard orders created using this copy function) yard orders have references to each other to enable a quick switch between inbound yard order to outbound yard order and vice-versa. You do this is using the Switch To <Inbound or Outbound> YO tab.

○ The yard order copy function is possible in all yard order statuses except when the status is Cancelled.○ After creating a yard order using this copy function, if you make changes in a yard order, you have to make

the changes manually in the corresponding yard order. The system does not synchronize the two yard orders.

○ In the case where a yard request copy is created, that is, a yard request link exists, the system gives an error if you try to create the opposite yard order. You have to release the opposite yard request to generate the opposite yard order. This restriction avoids the creation of multiple yard orders for the same yard request. In this scenario, the yard order Switch To <Inbound or Outbound> YO function also works. This means that when the corresponding yard request is released, the yard order that is created has a reference to the linked yard order if it is also created by releasing the corresponding yard request.

● Switch To <Inbound or Outbound> YO tabIn the case of linked inbound and outbound yard orders, you use this switch function tab in the yard order to directly switch between inbound to outbound yard order and vice-versa. For example, from an inbound yard order screen, you can select the Switch To Outbound YO tab to open the corresponding outbound yard order.

● Check-in and Check-out tabsYou can check-in an inbound yard order and check-out an active outbound yard order from the yard order maintenance screen. For more information, see Check-In and Check-Out a Yard Order [page 109].

● Reverse Check-in/Check-out tabYou can use this function to cancel all the actions executed during the check-in of an inbound yard order and check-out of an outbound yard order.○ Reverse Check-in

The system allows you to reverse the check-in only if you have not processed any yard task of the yard order. When you execute a reverse check-in:○ The status of the inbound yard order changes from Active to Planned.○ The status of the first yard task of the yard order changes from Pending to Created. This may not be

applicable for cross docking yard tasks.○ The TU Control Flag for the items is now unchecked.

○ PrintWhen you click the Print button, you get the following options:○ Print Immediately

1. When you select this option, the Printing Options popup appears.2. Select the Action Definition.

NoteYou are provided with the following predefined Actions. You can copy the existing PPF action to create one of your own and extend it.○ YO document printing manually – You have to trigger manual printing of the yard order.○ YR document manual printing – You have to trigger manual printing of the yard request.

3. Select the Spool Control Data that you have maintained.The system sends the document to the spool for printing.

○ Print Preview1. When you select this option, the Printing Options popup appears.2. Select the Action Definition. You are provided with some predefined actions.

84 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

The system generates a file that you can save on your local machine or open directly.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Yard Planning Yard Order .2. From here, you can create, edit or display a yard order.

More Information

Sections of a Yard Order [page 85]

4.2.1 Sections of a Yard Order

● General Data○ Yard Document Characteristic:

○ The system displays the Order Type. You can select this when you are creating the yard order.○ The system displays the Direction of the yard order, that is, whether the yard order is Inbound or

Outbound. You can select this when you are creating the yard order.○ The Yard Order Lifecycle Status field changes automatically depending on the phase of the yard order.

The lifecycle statuses of a yard order can be as follows:○ Planned

○ When you release a yard request, the system automatically creates a yard order with the Status as Planned.

○ When you manually create and save a yard order, the status of the yard is Planned○ Active

○ Inbound yard order – When you check-in an inbound yard order, the Status of the inbound yard order changes from Planned to Active. For more information, see Check-In and Check-Out a Yard Order [page 109]

○ Outbound yard order – When you select the Activate option on top of the yard order user interface, the Status of the outbound yard order changes from Planned to Active.

○ Completed – The Status of the yard order changes to Completed when:○ Inbound yard order – You select the Complete option on the inbound yard order user

interface. In this case, the TU is no more assigned to this yard order though the TU is still on the yard.

○ Outbound yard order – You check-out the yard order. For more information, see Check-In and Check-Out a Yard Order [page 109].

○ The Execution Status of the yard order changes automatically based on the status of the yard tasks assigned to this yard order. The execution statuses of a yard order can be as follows:○ Not Started – When the yard request is created and the lifecycle status of the yard order is

Planned.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 85

○ In Progress – When you select the Start Processing option on the yard order.○ Partially Completed – When at least one yard task of the yard order is Confirmed and there

is at least one more yard task left to be executed.○ Completed – When all the tasks of the yard order are completed, that is, the Status of the yard

tasks are either Confirmed or Cancelled.○ Consistency Status - The Consistency Status of the yard order is Incomplete when the yard order

has at least one mandatory field that does not have any valid value. The incomplete yard order document cannot be checked-in for the inbound direction and cannot be activated for the outbound direction.

○ If you want to save the yard order as a template, select the Template indicator. For more information on templates, see Yard Request / Yard Order Template [page 62].

○ Archiving Status - The Archiving Status of a yard order is Not Archived. When you run the preprocessing archiving report using transaction SARA, the Archiving Status changes to In Process.

○ External Document ID - This field is used for a potential external document ID, which is the trigger for the creation of the document that you see in SAP Yard Logistics. For example, for the SAP TM Integration, this field contains the freight order number. It is a read-only field.

○ Vehicle InformationThis information is not mandatory.○ Enter the Carrier number to identify the entity responsible for executing the transport approaching or

leaving the yard. The SCAC field uniquely identifies a carrier.○ Enter the Driver name.○ Enter the Language Key for the driver's language of communication.○ Enter the Telephone number of the driver.

○ DimensionsDimensions are a total of all the items and the system calculates it automatically once you create the items. (For more information, see Yard Order - Items [page 90].)

● Administrative DataThe system determines this information automatically depending on the user and the time of creation and change of yard order.

● LocationsThe system reads the location data that you have maintained from the user interface under Master DataYard Layout Define Default Location for Yard Order/Yard Request . The system defaults the Arrival information for an inbound yard request and Departure information for an outbound yard request. You can overwrite this data. See Yard Layout [page 41].

● Items○ From a yard order, you can create a yard task for an item when the Status of the yard order is Active. You

can do this only when you have entered the TU Number for the item.○ Once you check-in an inbound yard order, you can create new items. You, however, cannot delete the items

that were created before the check-in.For more information, see Yard Order - Items [page 90].

● TasksYou can create a yard task from here only when the Status of the yard order is Planned.For more information, see Yard Order - Tasks [page 102].

● Business PartnerFor further information, see Business Partner [page 80].

● Date/TimeFor more information, see Date and Time [page 79].

86 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

● ReferenceThis is the header reference for the yard order. For further information, see Reference [page 81].

● Yard Document FlowHere, you can view all the relevant documents associated with this yard order. You can see the relevant documents under Predecessor Business Documents and Successor Business Documents. For example, for a yard order, under Predecessor Business Documents, you can see the yard request associated with this yard order. You can select the Business Document Number to go to the document directly from here.

● Change DocumentsYou can enter a time frame to see all the changes made to the yard order during that time period. If you do not enter any time interval, the system displays all changes at a glance.

● Output ManagementThis is based on the Post Processing Framework (PPF). When the Yard Order Lifecycle Status changes, the system executes the process in the background. The result of this background processing is displayed in the Output Management section.○ You can select an action in Output Management to see the details for the same.○ If an action is unsuccessful, you can Regenerate the action.○ You can manually generate a new action from here, for example, manual printing of the yard order.○ You can regenerate an action from here, for example, reprint the yard order.

● Questionnaire sectionAnswer all the questions in the Questionnaire section. The questionnaire consists of automatically generated questions. It is mandatory to answer all the questions before you check-in or check-out the yard order. For more information, see Questionnaire [page 155].

4.2.2 Yard Order Overview

Use

Use this function to generate a list of yard orders that belong to your yard. You have an overview of the planned workload for your yard in a certain time frame. From the overview screen, you can:

● Create a new yard order manually (For more information, see Create Yard Order Manually [page 89].)● Select a yard order to display it in a new window● Select a yard order to edit it● Select a yard order to copy it● Select a yard order to delete it● Select a yard order to check-in at arrival or check-out at departure● Select a yard order to export the content to a spreadsheet● Refresh the yard order screen

You can also view the references maintained for the yard order from this overview screen. There is a column with the type of reference document under which you can see the document for the yard order. You can configure the types of reference documents that you would like the system to display on this screen, for example, freight orders, invoices. To configure this, maintain the reference document types in Customizing for Define Additional References for YR/YO Overview under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 87

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Yard Planning Yard Order Overview Yard Orders .The Yard Order Overview List screen appears.

2. Select the Settings button on the top left side of the screen to maintain the following user­specific settings:○ Selecting your yard○ Selecting the inbound checkpoint○ Selecting the outbound checkpoint○ Whether the system should display the text message to be sent to the driver before sending it. For more

information, see Driver Communication [page 149].The system generates a list of yard orders that belong to your yard.

3. To find your yard order, select the Quick Criteria Maintenance option and enter your yard order number or a range of numbers.

4. Select a yard order to display, edit, copy, delete, export it or to check-in/check-out the yard order.

More Information

SAP Personal Object Worklist Library (POWL)

Go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose Technology Platform SAP NetWeaver (select a relevant release, for example) SAP NetWeaver 7.4 Application Help . Look for SAP Personal Object Worklist Library.

4.2.3 Yard Request / Yard Order Template

You use this function create a yard request/yard order template. You can use this template to create similar yard requests/yard orders for frequently occurring incoming and outgoing transports, like a train that arrives every Monday with a similar makeup.

Features

● You can create a template in the following ways:○ Create a yard request/yard order and select the Template indicator.○ Copy an existing yard request/yard order or a yard request/yard order template and select the Template

indicator. In this case, the system does not create a default yard task for the copied yard request/yard order.

● You can convert a yard request with status as Created and a yard order with status as Planned to a template by selecting the Template indicator.

● Once you save a yard request/yard order as a template, you cannot deselect the Template indicator.● When you select the Template indicator on the yard request/yard order screen, you can see Template as a part

of the document header.

88 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

● When you create a yard request/yard order, you get the option to select the template that you want to use to create the yard request/yard order.

● A yard document, which was set like a template, cannot be moved to the execution phase. That is, a template yard request cannot be released and a template yard order cannot be checked-in for inbound or activated for outbound directions accordingly.

NoteIf you want to create a template document based on another document, which is already complete or active, then you can use the Copy function and then mark the newly-copied document as a template.

4.2.4 Create Yard Order Manually

Context

Use this procedure to create a yard order manually from the user interface.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Yard Planning Yard Order Create Yard Order .

NoteYou can also create a yard order from the Yard Order Overview List screen. (For more information, see Yard Order Overview [page 87].)

The Yard <Yard Number>, Create Yard Order screen appears.

2. Select the Settings option to enter the yard number for which you want to create a yard order.

Note

You have maintained the Yard Number in Customizing for Define Yard Numbers under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Setting up the Yard .

3. Select the Order Type.

The Order Type can be a truck, rail, ship, and so on.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 89

NoteYou have maintained the Order Type and assigned it to a yard warehouse number in Customizing for Define Order Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

4. Select the Direction of the yard order, that is, whether the transportation unit is Inbound or Outbound.

5. If you want to create a yard order using a template, select the Yard Order Template Number. Select the Continue option.

6. The system proposes the planned start date and time. You can edit the same. Select the Continue option.○ The Yard Order <Yard Number>, Create Yard Order screen appears.○ The Consistency Status of the yard order is Consistent. The system evaluates the Consistency Status

when you save the yard order document.○ If you are creating the yard order using a template, the system adjusts the date and time records. The

system does not copy the actual date and time from the template document.7. Enter the relevant information in the different sections. (For more information, see Sections of a Yard Order

[page 85].)8. Save the yard order. The system automatically assigns a number to the yard order. This is due to the number

range customizing. (For more information on number range, see Yard Order [page 82].)9. Inbound yard order

1. Select the Check-in option in an inbound yard order to change the status of the yard order to Active. For more information on check-in of an inbound yard order, see Check-In and Check-Out a Yard Order [page 109].

2. Once you select the Start Processing option on the screen, the first yard task is released for execution.3. From this screen, you can edit, delete or cancel the yard order if it has not started processing.4. You can select the Complete option to close the processing for an inbound yard order. After you select this

option, the status of the yard order changes to Completed. With this status, the yard order cannot be changed anymore. The TUs are released from this yard order. See Transportation Unit Control [page 118].

Outbound yard order1. Select the Activate option to change the status of an outbound yard order to Active.2. Once you select the Start Processing option on the screen, the first yard task is released for execution.3. From this screen, you can edit, delete or cancel the yard order if it has not started processing.4. Once you select the Check-out option on the outbound yard order, the yard order is completed and the

TUs have left the yard.

4.2.5 Yard Order - Items

Use

This function enables you to create items and to structure the arriving or departing transportation unit (TU).

90 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

ExampleTrain items can be the locomotive and the railcars attached to it. Each railcar can contain one or more container. Each item has a TU type, for example, truck, locomotive, railcar, container.

● You can maintain the child to parent relationship between items.● You can assign an icon type to a TU type in Customizing. The system displays this icon against an item

associated with this TU type. Else, the system displays a default icon for the item.● The items can be of the following types:

○ Grouping ItemsGrouping items serve as a grouping object in the hierarchy of items. It does not physically exist in the yard. You can create a number of items and group them under a grouping item. You can then assign this grouping item to a yard task. It saves you from assigning individual items to a yard task. Grouping items serve as a logical handle to reference the grouped items. The group can be dissolved in the yard after check-in.To create a grouping item, you have to select the TU Type as one that has been defined for a group. You can enter the TU Group External ID in the Transportation Unit field. This TU Group External ID helps you to identify the TU group. It is not mandatory for you to enter this. If you do enter the external ID, then it should be unique in scope of a yard order.

○ Non-grouping ItemsThese are physical objects in the yard. Non-grouping items can be of the following types:○ Carrying items: Other items can be loaded on to these items. Mostly, such items are movable,

actively or passively, for example, trucks, trailers, locomotives, rail cars.○ Loading items: Items that can be loaded on top of other items, for example, containers. The most

complex case for yard order creation are piggyback transports. For example, trucks that enter a yard and then are loaded onto railcars. Here, the truck is a carrying item but is also a loading item when it is loaded onto the rail car.

For more information on Item Hierarchy, see Item Hierarchy [page 69].

Prerequisites

You have defined the TU types and how a TU type is used in yard processes in Customizing for Define Transportation Unit Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master DataSettings for Transportation Unit General Settings .

Features

You have to maintain the following information for an item:

● Item Details○ The system automatically assigns an Item Number. This is a mandatory field.○ Select the Transportation Unit Type and enter the Transportation Unit. Transportation Unit uniquely

identifies the TU. These are mandatory fields. (For more information, see Check Transportation Unit Number of Containers [page 70] and Check Transportation Unit Number of Railcars [page 72].)

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 91

○ Enter the Means of Transport, for example, truck, ship, rail and so on. This is a mandatory field.○ Enter the Packaging Material for the TU. The system automatically proposes data such as the allowed

weight and volume from the relevant product master record. This is a mandatory field.○ Enter the License Plate Number of the TU.○ Select the Country of Registration of the TU.

NoteThe fields that are a part of the master data of the TU, such as the Country of Registration, License Plate Number, Additional External Identification are propagated to the TU that is assigned to the yard order item. This happens when you save the yard order.

○ Additional External Identification is another external unique identifier for the TU, for example, RFID.○ The Transportation Unit Empty indicator is set if the TU is empty. This indicator is set automatically by the

system. If the TU has another TU loaded on it, the indicator is not set for the first TU. For example, a truck has a container in it, then the indicator is not set for the truck but may be set for the container. If the container has some content in it, the indicator is not be set for the container.

○ If the TU Control Flag is selected, the yard order item has control over the TU. For more information, see Transportation Unit Control [page 118].

○ The Dangerous Goods flag indicates whether the Content tab contains dangerous goods, that is, whether the DG Regulation field has an entry. In the Content tab:○ If you enter the DG Regulation or the system determines it automatically, the system automatically

sets this indicator○ If the system determines the DG Regulation automatically, the system automatically sets this

indicator. The system can be setup to determine the DG Regulation automatically.○ If you do not enter or you remove the DG Regulation, the system does not set this indicator

○ Transportation Unit Cleaned indicator○ This indicator is unchecked if the TU assigned to the yard order item is not cleaned.○ This indicator is checked if the TU assigned to the yard order item is cleaned.

● DimensionsThe system automatically determines this based on the data from the packaging material. You can update the same. These dimensions are added to the Dimensions section of the General Data in the first part of the yard order.

● ContentThe content is the product inside the transportation unit (TU). You can select the product from those available in the system or you can enter the product.○ Inbound yard order - When you check-in an inbound yard order, the system copies the content of the yard

order to the associated transportation unit.○ Outbound yard order - When you activate an outbound yard order, the system does not copy the content

to the associated transportation unit. When you check-out an outbound yard order, the system copies the content from the transportation unit to the outbound yard order.

Dangerous GoodsYou can set the yard as equipped to handle dangerous goods and the related dangerous goods fields in Customizing for Define Yard Numbers under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard LogisticsMaster Data Setting up the Yard . Then, in the Content tab, you can enter the DG Regulation for the product. The other dangerous goods fields are populated as per your settings from the dangerous goods master data.If the TU contains dangerous good, it may need to be treated in a special manner, for example, separation check. If a TU contains two products, the system checks the first product of each TU to give a warning if you

92 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

have maintained the DG Regulation and Class in the Customizing for Define Separation Keys for Dangerous Goods under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Dangerous Goods .For more information, see Dangerous Goods [page 73].

● StatusThis is the TU status of an item assigned to a yard order that is for display only. This is based on the EWM-TU. The different statuses are as follows:○ CHKI – When you check-in the yard order, the status of the item displays as CHKI and it is marked with the

check-in timestamp.○ BLAC – When you Set General Block for a TU from the yard cockpit, the status of the item displays as BLAC

and it is marked with timestamp of setting the general block. Now, you cannot confirm the yard task to which this item is assigned. You must unblock the TU to confirm the yard task.

○ CHKO – When you check-out the yard order, the status of the item displays as CHKO and it is marked with the check-out timestamp.

○ DD – When the TU is docked at the EWM-Door, the status of the item displays as DD and it is marked with the timestamp of docking at EWM-Door.

NoteYou can define your own aggregation rules depending on the existing statuses for the current item using the Business Add-in (BAdI) /SAPYL/ITEM_BL_STATUS in Customizing for BAdI: Yard Order Item Blocking Status under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics .

● Loading SchemeA loading scheme defines how a TU can be loaded with other TUs. A loading scheme is assigned to an item. When the user assigns a subitem to such an item, the system checks if such a TU can be loaded onto the higher level TU.In a yard order, for an Item, based on the TU Type that you enter, the system checks whether a loading scheme can be assigned to it. The system also checks whether the item is a carrying item or a loading item or both.○ Loading Layout section

If the item is a carrying item and if the loading scheme can be assigned to the TU, the fields Loading Scheme and Layout are activated. Once you select the Loading Scheme, it is mandatory to select the Layout. As a Loading Scheme can consist of up to two levels, you can define the layout of each level.

○ Positioning sectionIf the item is a loading item, and you have entered the Loading Scheme and Layout for the parent item, you can enter the Position and Level for the TU under the Positioning sectionIf the item is a carrying item and a loading item, you can enter the carrying details under the Loading Layout section and the loading details under the Positioning section.

Note

○ You have defined the loading scheme in Customizing for Define Loading Scheme under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation UnitLoading and Stacking .

○ You have assigned a loading scheme to a TU type in Customizing for Define Transportation Unit Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit General Settings .

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 93

○ You can implement the Business Add-in /SAPYL/YO_LOADING_SCHEME to enhance the determination and validation of the loading scheme before saving of the yard order. You can implement this BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Yard Order Loading Scheme Enhancement (Determination + Validation) under

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Units .

● Reference sectionThis is the item reference for the yard order. For more information, see Reference [page 81].

● MeasurementYou can create a yard task with activity type that requires the task to collect some measurements for a TU. (For more information, see the Measurements section of Sections of a Yard Task [page 113].)Here, the system only displays the recorded Measurements. You cannot create, edit or delete an entry.

● ThresholdThe limits of a threshold are used to validate TU measurements. If the TU measurement is not within the threshold limits, the system raises an alert (as defined in the threshold). You can maintain the threshold record with the values for a yard order.When you check-in an inbound yard order or activate an outbound yard order with thresholds for an item, the system copies the thresholds to the TU assigned to the item. After this, you cannot edit the thresholds for the yard order item.You can implement the business add-in, Determine Thresholds for Yard Order Item (/SAPYL/YO_ITEM_THRESHOLD_DET) to implement the logic for changing yard order item thresholds before copying them to the S&R Activity of TU. You can implement this BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Determine Thresholds for Yard Order Item under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

● Seal NumberA seal number is valid only for outbound yard orders. You can maintain the Seal Number for a yard order only when the Status of the yard order is Active.You can define the maximum number of seal numbers for a yard number and a TU Type in Customizing for Define Number of Seals under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master DataSettings for Transportation Unit Seal Numbers .In a yard order, you have to maintain at least one seal number for this yard number and TU Type. If you do not maintain the seal number, and you try to check-out the yard order, the system gives an error.

● Item TU DetailsThe system defaults the location of the TU if the TU is present in the yard. This can happen during the following processes:○ When you check-in an inbound yard order, the TUs assigned to the yard order○ When you activate an outbound yard order, the TUs assigned to the yard order○ When you execute a yard task on the TU

● Dock Appointment SchedulingYou can create one or multiple appointments manually for an item. When you save the yard order, the system assigns an appointment number to the appointment. You can select the appointment number and go the appointment document. Here, you can plan the time slot for the appointment. See Dock Appointment Scheduling [page 168] and Appointment Management.

● Warehouse VisitsMaintain this section so that the system can send notifications to different EWM warehouses that are maintained within different EWM business systems. See Integration to SAP EWM [page 160].

● Classification DataHere, you maintain the classification data for TUs. This is used during TU determination.

94 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

○ You are provided with the standard classification tables, /SAPYL/YO_ITEM and /SAPYL/YARD_TU, and the standard class type, CTU.

○ You have defined the characteristics for the standard class type CTU. To do so, from the user interface, go to Master Data Classification Maintain Characteristics (or transaction CT04). See http://help.sap.com/saphelp_scm41/helpdata/en/bc/a57767d78a1b4db5941aa10351524f/frameset.htm.

○ You have defined the classes for the standard class type CTU. To do so, from the user interface, go to Master Data Classification Maintain Classes (or transaction CL02). See http://help.sap.com/

saphelp_scm41/helpdata/en/d2/f63349ccacef4594b7cad2cdb00adb/frameset.htm.○ On the yard order user interface, select the item to maintain the classification data for the item.○ If you do not enter the TU for an item, you can maintain the classification data for the yard order item. You

can edit these values.○ When you save a TU from a yard order item, the characteristics of the yard order item are copied to the

characteristics of the TU. This is valid only if the TU is used in only one yard order document.○ If the TU is used in multiple yard orders at the same time, the characteristics cannot be maintained in the

yard order and are not copied to the TU.○ When the yard order item is deleted, all classification data that belongs to this yard order item is also

deleted.○ Once you enter a TU:

○ If the TU exists in the system, the classification data is defaulted here. You cannot edit the values if the TU is used in several yard order documents.

○ If the TU does not exist in the system, you can enter the classification data and save your entries. When the yard order document is active, you can change the characteristic values from the TU document. See Maintain Yard Transportation Unit [page 139].

○ If you delete the TU assigned to an item of a yard order, the characteristic values of the yard order item will be available for input.

○ All the mandatory characteristics should have a value if the characteristic belongs to the TU. Else, you cannot save the TU.

○ TU Determination for ClassificationYou have the TU Determination option. If you select this for a yard order item, the system determines the suitable TU number for the active outbound yard order item based on the TU master data like TU type, means of transport, packaging material and also based on the characteristic values.

Activities

To create an item and a subitem:

1. Go to the yard order.2. Select the Items option.

3. Select New Item .4. Enter the relevant information for the item.5. Create a subitem for an item, if required. See Item Hierarchy [page 69]. To create a subitem:

6. Select an item. Then choose New Subitem .7. Enter the relevant information for the subitem and save your entries.

You can execute the following functions for a yard order item:

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 95

● Copy an item:1. Select the item that you want to copy.2. Select the Copy button.

The system creates a duplicate line copying the information from the selected item. The new item is created on the same hierarchy level as the selected item.

● 1. Select the item that you want to delete.2. Select the Delete button.

The system deletes the item and all the child items.● Create Task● TU Release

When you select this option in a yard order for an item, the dependent TU is released from the yard request and the TU control is removed. This is only possible if there are no open yard tasks with yard order reference left for this TU.

● TU DeterminationIf an active outbound yard order item does not have a TU assigned to it, you can select this option. The system gives you all the TU options that are suitable to the yard order item as per master data and classification data. You can select a TU to assign it to the item. You are provided with the Business Add-in /SAPYL/YO_ITEM_TU_DETERM to restrict the result key list for transportation unit determination of the yard order item. You can implement the BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Determine TU for Yard Order Items under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

● TU DetailsIf a TU is assigned to an item, you can select this option to view the TU document. This option is disabled when there is no TU assigned to an item or when the Yard Order Lifecycle Status is Planned.

4.2.5.1 Item Hierarchy

Use

The items can be of the following types:

● Grouping ItemsGrouping items serve as a grouping object in the hierarchy of items. It does not physically exist in the yard. You can create a number of items and group them under a grouping item. You can then assign this grouping item to a yard task. It saves you from assigning individual items to a yard task. Grouping items serve as a logical handle to reference the grouped items. The group can be dissolved in the yard after check-in.To create a grouping item, you have to select the TU Type as one that has been defined for a group. You can enter the TU Group External ID in the Transportation Unit field. This TU Group External ID helps you to identify the TU group. It is not mandatory for you to enter this. If you do enter the external ID, then it should be unique in scope of a yard order.

● Non-grouping ItemsThese are physical objects in the yard. Non-grouping items can be of the following types:○ Carrying items: Other items can be loaded on to these items. Mostly, such items are movable, actively or

passively, for example, trucks, trailers, locomotives, rail cars.○ Loading items: Items that can be loaded on top of other items, for example, containers. The most

complex case for yard order creation are piggyback transports. For example, trucks that enter a yard and

96 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

then are loaded onto railcars. Here, the truck is a carrying item but is also a loading item when it is loaded onto the rail car.

Prerequisites

● You have indicated the TU type associated with this item as a Grouping item or a Carrying item in Customizing for Define Transportation Unit Types under Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation UnitGeneral Settings .

● You have maintained the parent child relationship in the Customizing for Maintain Transportation Unit Loading Hierarchy under Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit Loading and Stacking

Features

● Transportation units that cannot be moved without any carrying transportation unit should not be created as a top-level item in a yard request or a yard order.

● Top-level items can be grouping items or carrying items.● Below a grouping item, all kind of subitems (grouping and non-grouping) can be defined as sub items.● It is not possible to create a loading subitem that has no carrying ancestor. This means when creating a

loading subitem that is not at the same time a carrying item, the system checks that going up the hierarchy, there is at least one hierarchy item that is a carrying item.

● It is not possible to create a non-loading item below a carrying item. Thus, the system checks that for any non-grouping subitem that has a non-grouping ancestor item, the subitem can be loaded on top of the item. For this check, the system checks the TU Loading Hierarchy that you have maintained in the Customizing.

● If a carrying item has a loading scheme definition, including the definition of corresponding layouts (currently the system has a limit of two layouts for two levels), then the system checks the number of subitems against the number of slots in the defined layouts. The number of subitems have to be less or equal to the number of slots. In addition, the system takes the capacity of the loading scheme, according to the length of a slot, into account. An item can only be loaded onto a slot that provides sufficient length.

● You cannot edit an outbound yard request or yard order item if open yard tasks with status Planned, Active or In Process exist for the document.

● If a yard task is assigned to an item and you change the TU Number for this item, the system automatically updates the dependent TU data for the assigned yard tasks.

4.2.5.2 Check Transportation Unit Number of Containers

Use

This function checks the transportation unit (TU) number of containers for a yard request or a yard order.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 97

Features

For the containers, it is very important that the TU number corresponds to certain rules. This is based on ISO 6346, which is an international standard covering the coding, identification and marking of intermodal (shipping) containers used within containerized intermodal freight transport. Such code has to be registered at the Bureau International des Conteneurs in Paris to ensure uniqueness worldwide. This standard coding consists of the following parts:

● Owner CodeThe owner code consists of three capital letters to indicate the owner or principal operator of the container. You define it as Bureau International des Containers et du Transport Intermodal (BIC) code in Customizing.

● Equipment Category IdentifierThe system supports the following capital letters:○ U – For all freight containers○ J – For all detachable freight containers○ Z – For all trailers and chassis

● Serial NumberThe serial number consists of 6 numeric digits, assigned by the owner or operator, uniquely identifying the container within that owner/operator’s fleet. The system determines this based on an algorithm specified in ISO 6346. You can maintain the settings for this algorithm in the system.

● Check DigitThe check digit consists of one numeric digit providing a means of validating the recording and transmission accuracies of the owner code and serial number. The system determines this based on an algorithm specified in ISO 6346. You can maintain the settings for this algorithm in the system.

If for a TU type, you have maintained the settings for a check, the system carries out the checks for the TU number and gives an error if the TU number does not comply with the checks.

NoteFor a TU type, if you have not defined a check routine in the Customizing, the system does not execute any check.

Activities

● The system provides standard settings for the TU number check for a container.You can define the Bureau International des Containers et du Transport Intermodal (BIC) code in Customizing for Define Container Number Owner Codes under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard LogisticsMaster Data Settings for Transportation Unit Transportation Unit Validation Container .

● If you do not want the system to check the TU number of a TU type as per the standard rules, you can define your own rules via classes and methods.You can define the classes and methods for a TU type in Customizing for Define Classes and Methods for Checking TU Number under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master DataSettings for Transportation Unit Transportation Unit Validation General .

98 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

4.2.5.3 Check Transportation Unit Number of Railcars

Use

This function checks the transportation unit (TU) number of railcars for a yard request or a yard order.

Features

● For the rail industry in Europe, it is very important that the TU number corresponds to certain rules. This is based on the UIC Code of Practice 438-3, Identification marking for tractive stock. A complete number comprises 12 digits.○ Digits 1–2

This is the type code.○ Digits 3–4

This is the country of origin.○ Digits 5–11

This is defined by the country concerned.○ Digits 12

This is the check digit.The check digit consists of one numeric digit providing a means of validating the recording and transmission accuracies of the owner code and serial number. The system determines this based on an algorithm specified in ISO 6346. You can maintain the settings for this algorithm in the system.

○ Owner's CodeThis is the abbreviation for the country of origin and the owner of the vehicle.

If for a TU type, you have maintained the settings for a check, the system carries out the checks for the TU number and gives an error if the TU number does not comply with the checks.

NoteFor a railcar, if you have not defined a check routine in the Customizing, the system does not execute any check.

Activities

The system provides standard settings for the TU number check for a railcar as follows:

● You can define the code for each type of railway vehicle in Customizing for Define Types of Railway Vehicles under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit Transportation Unit Validation Rail .

● You can define the Class Number for railway vehicles in Customizing for Define Class Number for Railway Vehicles under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit Transportation Unit Validation Rail .

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 99

● You can define the country code for railcars in case of certain countries in Customizing for Define Country Code for Railcars under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit Transportation Unit Validation Rail .

If you do not want the system to check the TU number of a TU type as per the standard rules, you can define your own rules via classes and methods using general interface /SAPYL/IF_TU_EXT_NO_CHECK.

You can define the classes and methods for a TU type in Customizing for Define Classes and Methods for Checking TU Number under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit Transportation Unit Validation General .

4.2.5.4 Dangerous Goods

Use

Use this process to maintain the settings for dangerous goods. If the transportation unit (TU) contains dangerous good, it may need to be separated from other TUs of the same yard request or yard order.

NoteIf a TU contains two products, the system checks the first product of each TU to give a warning if you have maintained an entry in the Master Data for Assign Separation Keys to Product Master Data under Master Data

Dangerous Goods . See Dangerous Goods - Assign Separation Keys to Product Master Data [page 25].

You can enter the product as a dangerous good for a yard request or a yard order.

● In the case of a yard request, if two TUs have to be kept separated from each other, when you save the yard request:○ The system saves the yard request○ The Status of the yard request changes to Blocked.○ The user interface displays a warning message.

You have to make changes to the dangerous goods settings either in the user interface or in the Customizing to unblock the yard request.

● In the case of a yard order, if two TUs have to be kept separated from each other, when you save the yard order, you get an error message and the system does not save the yard order.You have to make changes to the dangerous goods settings either in the user interface or in the Customizing to save the yard order.

Process

To maintain dangerous goods in the system, in Customizing for Define Yard Numbers under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Setting up the Yard , maintain the following settings:

100 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

● Dangerous Goods – If you select Yes here, it indicates that the yard is equipped to handle dangerous goods. Then, in the Content tab, you can enter the DG Regulation for the product. The other dangerous goods fields are populated as per your settings.If you select Yes here, the system calls the BAdI: Dangerous Goods Checks During Check-In/Check-Out (BAdI /SAPYL/DG_CHECK_CICO) for dangerous goods checks during check-in/check-out of yard order. You can set the rules in the BAdI such that the system can reject the check-in and check-out of the yard order and can set the status of the yard order to Blocked. You can maintain this BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Dangerous Goods Checks During Check-In/Check-Out under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Dangerous Goods .

● DG Data Source - Determines the dangerous goods data origin for the yard. This affects the product of an item in a yard order. You have the following options:○ External System - The dangerous goods master data is stored in the business object yard order. In the yard

order item Content tab, the dangerous goods fields are disabled for input. Once you check-in the yard order, the data is stored in the business object of the transportation unit.

○ EH&S - The dangerous goods master data is stored in the dangerous goods master (transactions /SEHS/DGD03, /SEHS/HMD). In the yard order item Content tab, the dangerous goods fields are disabled for input. Once you check-in the yard order, you can see this data from the overview transaction of the transportation unit. It is automatically filled from the dangerous goods master data.The system also validates the existence of EH&S master data for the combination of product and regulation.

○ Manually Maintained - The dangerous goods master data is stored in the business object yard order. In the yard order item Content tab, the dangerous goods fields are enabled for input. Once you check-in the yard order, the data is stored in the business object of the transportation unit.

NoteYou are provided with the following Business Add-Ins to redetermine dangerous goods data:○ BAdI: Dangerous Goods Data Redetermination for TU (/SAPYL/BADI_DG_DETERMINE_TU) - This BAdI

is used to redetermine dangerous goods data for a transportation unit, that is, the fields for dangerous goods are filled with values and you want to change them.

○ BAdI: Dangerous Goods Data Redetermination for Yard Order (/SAPYL/BADI_DG_DETERMINE_YO) - This BAdI is used to redetermine dangerous goods data for a yard order item, that is, the fields for dangerous goods are filled with values and you want to change them.

You can implement these BAdIs in Customizing under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Dangerous Goods .

● DG Check - Determines whether the dangerous goods checks are applicable for the yard number. The system checks whether the checks should be applied to the product and the yard order when you save or enter some data in dangerous goods fields.○ No Check - The system does not execute any check.○ Separation Key Check - This option switches on checks based on separation keys for the products.

Customizing required are:

○ Assign Separation Keys to Product Master Data [page 25] - From the user interface, go to Master Data Dangerous Goods Assign Separation Keys to Product Master Data .

○ Define Separation Keys for Dangerous Goods under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Dangerous Goods .

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 101

Separation keys are defined for Dangerous Goods Regulation. For each Dangerous Goods Regulation, you can assign a separation key. For each separation key, you assign a Dangerous Goods Class. The class is a standard parameter and every dangerous good has a class associated with it.

○ Define Separation Check Rules for Dangerous Goods under SAP Customizing Implementation GuideYard Logistics Master Data Settings for Dangerous Goods .

Here, you assign the two separation keys and define whether the products associated with the two separation keys should be allowed or denied together. You can also define a check rule if you are not sure whether they should be allowed or denied together. In this case, you assign a Check Rule ID.

○ You can assign a Dangerous Good Check Rule Implementation Class to the Check Rule ID in Customizing for Assign Check Rule Implementation Class to Check Rule ID under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Dangerous Goods .You assign a Check Rule Implementation Class to the Check Rule ID. You can define your own rule in the class to determine whether the products associated with the two separation keys should be allowed or denied together.

NoteYou are not required to maintain a Check Rule ID if the default implementation is used.

Example

You are running a rail yard. You have a train that has a container carrying some toxic material and there is a container carrying some food product. You may not like to have the container carrying the toxic material close to the container carrying food product. Hence, the system has to carry out some checks to let you know that these two containers cannot be kept close to each other.

More Information

● Yard Request - Items [page 64]● Yard Order - Items [page 90]● Yard Task - Items [page 123]

4.2.6 Yard Order - Tasks

Use

This function allows you to create, maintain and display a yard task from a yard order. Yard tasks are descriptions of activities that must be done for items. They are activities that model all kinds of services on the yard like unloading, moving a transportation unit (TU) to a storage place, cleaning a TU, repairing a TU. Yard tasks are the key entities for planning and execution.

102 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

After you create a yard order, you create yard tasks and assign items to the task. (For more information, see Yard Order - Items [page 90].)

Features

● When you create a yard order, the system checks whether the default tasks are defined and if they are, then the system creates these tasks. The number of tasks may be different for inbound and outbound yard orders. You can create default tasks only for movement and non-movement activities and not for loading activities. You can delete or edit these tasks.

NoteYou maintain the default tasks to be created in inbound and outbound yard orders in Customizing for Define Default Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

● You can assign items to the yard tasks. To do so, select the item or grouping item and the yard task to which you want to assign the item. Choose the Assign option.

NoteYou can also set up the system to have an automatic yard order item assignment to a task. This happens only if you have maintained the same in Customizing for Define Default Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

● You can maintain a setting that controls whether the yard order items are automatically assigned to the default tasks or not. If you make this setting, the system always assigns all the items. You can make this setting in Customizing activity Define Default Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks . Select the Item Assignment indicator.

● You can create, edit, delete a yard task from the Tasks tab of a yard order only when the Status of the yard order is Planned.

● You can create a yard task from the Items tab of a yard order only when the Status of the yard order is Active. You can do this only when you have entered the TU Number for the item.

● You can delete yard tasks. To do so, select a yard task and choose the Delete option.● You can copy an existing yard task. To do so, select a yard task and choose the Copy option. If there are items

assigned to the yard task that you are copying, the system assigns the same items to the copied yard task.● Sections of a yard task

○ General○ Activity Type

Yard tasks are represented by Activity Types. It is mandatory to assign an Activity Type to a yard task.

Note

You have maintained the Activity Types in Customizing for Define Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

○ Activity CategoryThe Activity Category defines one of the possible scenarios of yard task execution.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 103

○ Activity Category can be of the following types:○ Movement○ Non-Movement○ Loading/Unloading

○ The system determines the Activity Category automatically once you enter the Activity Type.

NoteYou have maintained the Activity Category in Customizing for Define Activity Types under

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

○ Activity Category influences the yard item input behavior. The system determines the scenario that is executed based on the value of this field.

○ Cross-docking is not allowed in the case of Non-Movement activity category.○ Status○ Immediate Confirmation indicator

Once you activate the yard task, the system automatically confirms the yard task. You do not have to select the Start and Confirm buttons.

○ Yard Task QueueThe queue is one of the ways to manage the assignment of yard tasks to the user who is working with the yard task mobile user interface. The yard task is assigned to the queue either manually or automatically by the system.○ Manual assignment – You can enter the Yard Task Queue value manually in the yard task.○ Automatic determination of queue – The system determines the queue when you save the yard

task.○ Automatic determination of queue runs only for yard tasks that do not have any queue

assigned to them manually.○ Automatic determination of queue is based on the Activity Type, Source Storage Type and the

Destination Storage Type of the yard task. For more information, see Maintain Queue Determination [page 31].

○ Handling ResourceYou can manually enter the handling resource for a yard task. In this case, the system assigns this yard task to only this handling resource in the mobile user interface.

○ Business PartnerYou can assign a business partner for the yard task so that the system can execute the coordination and billing processes.

○ Execution (Planned)○ Planned Start Date

This is the date on which the task is planned to start. The system defaults the date that you have entered while creating the yard order. You can edit the same. It is mandatory to enter the Planned Start Date.

○ Planned Start TimeThe system defaults the time that you have entered while creating the yard order. You can edit the same. This is the time at which the task is planned to start. The system defaults the same time for all the tasks. Since you cannot execute all the tasks at the same time, change the time for the subsequent tasks. It is mandatory to enter the Planned Start Time.

○ Duration PlannedThe Duration Planned is proposed by the system but you can overwrite it.

104 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

NoteIf you are creating the yard order using a template, the system copies the yard tasks and then adjusts the planned execution date and time for those yard tasks where the planned date and time is in the past considering the yard task order and the duration between them.

○ Execution (Actual)○ Actual Start Date

This is the actual date on which the task was executed. The system determines the Actual Start Date.○ Actual Start Time

This is the actual time at which the task was executed. The system determines the Actual Start Time.○ Duration Actual

This is the actual duration of the task. The system determines the Duration Actual○ Yard Order Number

A yard task can have reference to only one yard order with the exception of a cross docking yard task.○ Cross Docking

In the case of cross docking, you enter the Destination Yard Order Number. Only outbound yard orders are allowed as destination yard order numbers.

○ SourceThis is the source location of the yard task.○ Can be entered manually. The system proposes the actual location of the first item in the yard task.○ It may happen that a yard task that has to be activated has no source location maintained for it. In this

case, during activation of the yard task, the system automatically assigns the actual location of the yard transportation unit assigned to the first yard task item as the source location.

○ In the case of an inbound yard order, the system defaults the inbound checkpoint of the yard order as the Source. This happens only if you have maintained the Movement Direction for the Activity Type as Check-in Movement in Customizing for Define Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

○ In the case of an outbound yard order, the system determines the source from the departure storage bin if you have maintained the Movement Direction for the Activity Type as Check-out Movement.

○ DestinationThis is the destination location of the yard task.○ In the case of an outbound yard order, the system defaults the Destination Location of the yard order

from the yard order outbound checkpoint if you have maintained the Movement Direction for the Activity Type as Check-out Movement.

○ In the case of an inbound yard order, the system determines the destination from the arrival storage bin if the you have maintained the Movement Direction for the Activity Type as Check-in Movement.

○ If you have indicated the Activity Type as relevant for subsystem, the Destination Location is determined from the subsystem.

○ If you have indicated the Activity Type as relevant for automatic destination location determination, the system determines the Destination Location based on the Customizing settings.

Note○ By default, here one of the subsystems is the EWM system that is maintained in the warehouse

visit.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 105

○ You have maintained the Activity Type as relevant for subsystem or destination location determination, in Customizing for Define Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

The location (storage bin type) should be compatible with the TU type. When you save the yard task, the system checks for this compatibility.

NoteYou have maintained the compatibility between the storage bin type and the transportation unit (TU) type in Customizing for Maintain Compatibility of TU Type and Storage Bin Type under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks Location Determination .

○ Predecessor and SuccessorIf you select the Positioning Type as Sequence (see Assign Visual Object Type to Storage Bin Type [page 39]), you can maintain the predecessor or successor while creating or confirming the yard task. During yard task activation, the system validates the correctness of the predecessor and successor. During yard task confirmation, the TU is inserted in the storage bin based on the predecessor or successor that you have maintained. If you do not maintain the predecessor or successor, the TU that is moved to the storage bin is added at the end of the TU sequence.

4.2.7 Date and Time

Use

This function enables you to plan the yard processes associated with a yard request or a yard order by entering the start and end date and time for the yard process.

● In the case of an inbound yard request or an inbound yard order, you enter only the Arrival date and time record type for the yard process.

● In the case of an outbound yard request or an outbound yard order, you enter only the Departure date and time record type for the yard process.

NoteWhen you create a yard request or a yard order, the system automatically creates a date and time record with the current date and time as the start and end date and time.

● In the case of an inbound yard request/yard order with an item that is dock appointment scheduling relevant, the planned arrival at checkpoint date/time determined in the appointment is taken over into the yard request/order header Date and Time tab.

The time zone is that of the yard number.

106 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

Prerequisites

You have defined the date and time record types in Customizing for Define Date and Time Record Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order . You are provided with

some default record types. You can create your own record types.

Activities

To enter the date and time for a yard activity:

1. Go to the yard request or yard order.2. Select the Date/Time option.3. Select Create.4. Select the Date/Time Record Type.5. Enter the start and end date and time, and save your entries.

To copy a date/time for a record type:

1. Select the row that you want to copy.2. Select the Copy button.

Another row of copied date/time is added to the list.

To delete a date/time for a record type:

1. Select the row that you want to delete.2. Select the Delete button.

The row of date/time is deleted from the list.

4.2.8 Business Partner

Use

This function enables you to maintain the business partners and business partner roles for the yard request and yard order.

You must store the business partner information related to the yard request or yard order so that the coordination and billing processes can be executed. Examples of business partner roles are ordering party, bill-to party, requester.

Prerequisites

You have defined the business partner roles for a combination of yard number and order type in Customizing for Define Business Partner Roles under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 107

Activities

To add a business partner and business partner role:

1. Go to the yard request or yard order.2. Select the Business Partner option.3. Select the Create button.4. Select the Business Partner Role.5. Select the Business Partner and save your entries.

The system defaults all the relevant information of the business partner on the screen.

To copy a business partner:

1. Select the business partner that you want to copy.2. Select the Copy button.

Another row of copied business partner is added to the list of business partners.

To delete a business partner:

1. Select the business partner that you want to delete.2. Select the Delete button.

The business partner is deleted from list of business partners.

4.2.9 Reference

Use

This function enables you to enter the documents that are related to the yard request or the yard order header and items. This can be a customer­specific document or any other document, for example, Freight Order, Requestor Reference ID, Contract Number.

● You can define reference types for the yard request header and items.● You can map external documents to yard request header and item reference documents● The system automatically adds reference documents to the yard request header when the document is

coming into the system via an interface, for example, from SAP Transportation Management.● You can also enter reference documents manually.● If you create a yard order by releasing a yard request, the yard order will have the same reference documents

as the yard request.

Prerequisites

● You have defined the header reference document types for the yard request or yard order in Customizing for Define Reference Document Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order . You are provided with some default reference types. You can create your own reference types.

108 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

● You have defined the item reference document types for the yard request or yard order in Customizing for Define Reference Document Item Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard LogisticsYard Request and Yard Order . You are provided with some default item reference types. You can create your own item reference types.

● You have assigned the header reference document types to the order type in Customizing for Assign Reference Types to Order Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

● You have assigned the header and item reference types to the TU type in Customizing for Assign Reference Types to TU Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

● You have mapped the external reference document types to the header reference document types for the yard request in Customizing for Map External Reference Documents to YR Header Reference Documents under

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Integration Integration to SAP Transportation Management . This is valid only for yard requests.

● You have mapped the external reference document types to the item reference document types for the yard request in Customizing for Map External Reference Documents to YR Item Reference Documents under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Integration Integration to SAP Transportation Management .

4.2.10 Check-In and Check-Out a Yard Order

Context

Use this procedure to check-in an inbound yard order and check-out an outbound yard order at the gate. When you check-in or check-out a yard order, you actually check-in or check-out the transportation units associated with the yard order.

Procedure

1. You can check-in or check-out a yard order in the following ways○ From the simplified view of the yard order

1. From the user interface, go to Yard Planning Yard Order Overview Yard Orders .The Yard Order Overview List screen appears.

2. Select the Settings button on the top left side of the screen to maintain user­specific settings, for example, selecting your yard.The system generates a list of yard orders that belong to your yard.

3. Select the yard order that you want to check-in or check-out and choose the Check-in/Check-out option.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 109

The Yard <Yard Number> Change <Inbound/Outbound> Yard Order <Yard Order Number> screen appears.

4. In the Gate Agent section, enter the Yard Document Characteristics and Vehicle Information.○ From the Yard Order maintenance screen

1. Go to the yard order maintenance screen.2. In the General section, enter the Yard Document Characteristics and Vehicle Information.

NoteThe Status of the yard order is Planned.

2. In the Date/Time section:○ In the case of an inbound yard order, you can enter the planned and actual, arrival check-in date and time

of the transportation unit.○ In the case of an outbound yard order, you can enter the planned and actual, departure check-out date

and time of the transportation unit.3. In the Reference section, you can only view the reference documents for this yard order. (For more information,

see Reference [page 81].)4. In the Tasks section, you can only view the tasks for this yard order. (For more information, see Yard Order -

Tasks [page 102].)5. Select the Check-in or Check-out option on the top of the screen.

If there are no errors in the document, the system checks-in or checks-out, and saves the yard order.

○ Check-in○ When you check-in an inbound yard order:

○ The Status of the yard order changes to Active.○ The first yard task of the inbound yard order is activated.

NoteYou have set the ActFirstYT indicator in Customizing activity Define Whether to Activate Yard Task of Yard Order Automatically under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

○ The subsequent yard tasks of the inbound yard order are activated. The system displays the errors during activation of the subsequent yard task as a warning only, so that the yard task confirmation is not stopped.

NoteYou have set the ActNextYT indicator in Customizing activity Define Whether to Activate Yard Task of Yard Order Automatically under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

○ The TU Control Flag for the items are now checked.○ To complete the inbound yard order, select the Complete option on top of the screen.

○ Check-out○ To activate the outbound yard order, select the Activate option on top of the screen.

110 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Planning

○ When you activate an outbound yard order:○ The first yard task of the outbound yard order is activated.

NoteYou have set the ActFirstYT indicator in Customizing activity Define Whether to Activate Yard Task of Yard Order Automatically under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

○ The subsequent yard tasks of the outbound yard order are activated. The system displays the errors during activation of the subsequent yard task as a warning only, so that the yard task confirmation is not stopped.

NoteYou have set the ActNextYT indicator in Customizing activity Define Whether to Activate Yard Task of Yard Order Automatically under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

○ You can check-out an outbound yard order only when:○ All the yard tasks assigned to the yard order have the Status as Confirmed or Cancelled. The

Execution Status of the yard order is Completed.○ All the items assigned to the yard order have the Status as Completed or Unassigned.

○ When you check-out an outbound yard order, the Status of the yard order changes from Active to Completed.

SAP Yard LogisticsPlanning C U S T O M E R 111

5 Execution

This component allows you to execute the operations for a yard.

A Yard Task [page 112] is the key entity for the execution phase.

5.1 Yard Task

Use

This function allows you to create, maintain and display a yard task. Yard tasks are definitions of activities that must be done for items. They are activities that model all kinds of services on the yard like unloading, moving a transportation unit (TU) to a storage place, cleaning a TU, repairing a TU. Yard tasks are the key entities for planning and execution.

Features

● When you activate a yard task, you cannot edit the task any more.● When you start the yard task, the task is assigned to the user to execute the task.● You can confirm the task once it is completed.● Usage of classifications in yard task

You can assign an item to the yard task of a yard order without any check for the compatibility of TU and yard order item classification. The system checks this compatibility only during yard task confirmation. During yard task confirmation, the system calls the Business Add-in /SAPYL/CLASSIFICATION_VAL to decide the behavior of the system. You are provided with an implementation of the BAdI that allows you to reserve such a TU for the yard order item but the system gives a warning message. You can create your own implementation of the BAdI to have some other behavior, for example, raise an error message and abort the reservation of TU if not all classification data are compatible between the item and TU. You can implement the BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Classification Validation under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .

● Number RangeThe system automatically assigns a number to a yard task. This is due to the customizing of number ranges for the yard tasks.○ You can define the number ranges for the yard tasks in Customizing for Define Number Ranges for Yard

Task under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Setting up the Yard Define Number Ranges for Yard Request, Yard Order, Yard Task .

○ You can then assign the number range in the No. field to a combination of a yard number and activity type in Customizing for Define Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics

Yard Tasks .

112 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Execution

More Information

Sections of a Yard Task [page 113]

5.1.1 Sections of a Yard Task

● General Data○ Activity Type

Yard tasks are represented by Activity Types. It is mandatory to assign an Activity Type to a yard task.

Note

You have maintained the Activity Types in Customizing for Define Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

○ Activity CategoryThe Activity Category defines one of the possible scenarios of yard task execution.○ Activity Category can be of the following types:

○ Movement○ Non-Movement○ Loading/Unloading

○ The system determines the Activity Category automatically once you enter the Activity Type.

Note

You have maintained the Activity Category in Customizing for Define Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

○ Activity Category influences the yard item input behavior. The system determines the scenario that is executed based on the value of this field.

○ Cross-docking is not allowed in the case of Non-Movement activity category.○ Status

The Status of a yard task depends on the phase of the yard task.○ Created - You can create a yard task from the yard request/yard order document when the status of

the yard request/yard order is Planned. In this case, the status of the yard task is Created. You can see the yard tasks belonging to this status from the Yard Task Overview screen. You, however, cannot edit this yard task from the yard task document.

○ Pending – When you create and save a yard task. When a task of the yard order is activated, the subsequent tasks still have the status Pending.

○ Active○ When you activate a yard task manually, the Status of the yard task changes to Active.○ The system activates the first task of the yard order when you select the Start Processing button

on the yard order.○ When a yard task is Confirmed, the status of the subsequent yard task of the same yard order

changes to Active.

SAP Yard LogisticsExecution C U S T O M E R 113

○ When the Status of the yard task is In Process, you can select the Reject button. The system changes the Status of the yard task back to Active.

○ In Process – When you select the Start button on the yard task user interface, the status of the yard task changes from Active to In Process.

○ Confirmed - When you confirm a yard task, the status of the yard task changes to Confirmed.○ Cancelled – When you select Cancel Task button on the yard task user interface, the status of the

yard task changes to Cancelled. You can use this option only when the Status of the yard task is Pending, Active or In Process.

NoteWhen the Status of a yard task is Cancelled, the subsequent yard task of the yard order, if there is any, is not activated. You may be required to either create another task and activate it or activate the subsequent task manually.

○ Confirmed – When you select the Confirm button on the yard task user interface, the status of the yard task changes from In Process to Confirmed.

○ Immediate Confirmation indicatorOnce you activate the yard task, the system automatically confirms the yard task. You do not have to select the Start and Confirm buttons.

○ Yard Task QueueThe queue is one of the ways to manage the assignment of yard tasks to the user who is working with the yard task mobile user interface. The yard task is assigned to the queue either manually or automatically by the system.○ Manual assignment – You can enter the Yard Task Queue value manually in the yard task.○ Automatic determination of queue – The system determines the queue when you save the yard task.

○ Automatic determination of queue runs only for yard tasks that do not have any queue assigned to them manually.

○ Automatic determination of queue is based on the Activity Type, Source Storage Type and the Destination Storage Type of the yard task. For more information, see Maintain Queue Determination [page 31].

You can change the queue for a yard task when the status of the yard task is either Active or In Process. To do so, select the Change button. Choose the Queue option. You can change the queue when a queue is already assigned to the yard task.

○ Handling ResourceYou can manually enter the handling resource for a yard task. In this case, the system assigns this yard task to only this handling resource in the mobile user interface.

○ High PriorityIf this indicator is set and the yard task is assigned to a queue, the system automatically determines the task with the earliest planned start time. The system maintains the start time for the current task in a way that it is one second earlier and, therefore, the first one in the queue.

○ Assigned UserThe system can automatically determine the user for a yard task. (For more information, see Queue Management [page 30]). You, however, can manually enter the user for a yard task. In this case, the system assigns this yard task to only this assigned user.You can change the user who is already assigned to a yard task when the status of the yard task is Active. To do so, select the Change button. Choose the User option.

○ Business Partner

114 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Execution

You can assign a business partner for the yard task so that the system can execute the coordination and billing processes. If you enter the business partner, it is possible for the system to organize the manual (phone calls) or automated communication (interface messages) with customers, as well as for the billing function to determine the correct business partner during the billing process.

○ Exception CodeBy exception, we mean some unexpected situation that may happen in the yard when you are executing yard tasks. When you enter an exception code to a yard task, the system automatically cancels the yard task. The system executes the settings associated with this exception code.For more information, see Maintain Exception Settings [page 119].

○ Summed Weight of All YT ItemsThis is the sum of the gross weight of all yard task items on the highest hierarchy level in the task.

○ Summed Length of All YT ItemsThis is the sum of the length of all yard task items on the highest hierarchy level in the task. This summed length is used when moving multiple linked TUs together, such as a train. It is used during the capacity check to verify if the TUs fit onto the destination.

○ Yard Order NumberA yard task can have reference to only one yard order with the exception of a cross docking yard task.

○ Archiving Status - The Archiving Status of a yard task is Not Archived. When you run the preprocessing archiving report using transaction SARA, the Archiving Status changes to In Process.

○ Execution (Planned)○ It is mandatory to enter the Planned Start Date and Planned Start Time for a yard task.○ The Planned Duration is proposed by the system but you can overwrite it.

○ Execution (Actual)The system determines the actual date, time and duration of the yard task when starting the task.

○ ConfirmationThe system defaults the information when you confirm the yard task.

○ Cross DockingIn the case of cross docking, you enter the Destination Yard Order Number. Only outbound yard orders are allowed as destination yard order numbers.

○ SourceThis is the source location of the yard task. You can maintain this manually. The system proposes the actual location of the first item in the yard.It may happen that a yard task that has to be activated has no source location maintained for it. In this case, during activation of the yard task, the system automatically assigns the actual location of the yard transportation unit assigned to the first yard task item as the source location.

○ DestinationThis is the destination location of the yard task. You can maintain this manually.○ You can indicate the Activity Type as not relevant for destination bin determination.

In the case of hazardous substances, the system checks whether the specified storage type allows you to store the product with the specific hazardous substances data particularly hazard rating 1 and hazard rating 2.

Note○ You have assigned the allowed hazard rating 1 for each storage type in Customizing for Assign

Permitted Hazard Rating 1 for Each Storage Type under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks Location Determination .

SAP Yard LogisticsExecution C U S T O M E R 115

○ You have assigned the allowed hazard rating 2 for each storage type in Customizing for Assign Permitted Hazard Rating 2 for Each Storage Type under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks Location Determination .

○ You can indicate the Activity Type as relevant for automatic destination bin determination. In this case, the system determines the Destination Location based on the Customizing settings.

Note○ By default, here the subsystem is the EWM system that is maintained in the warehouse visit.

Warehouse visit is assigned to the transportation unit of the yard task item.○ You have maintained the Activity Type as relevant for subsystem or destination location

determination, in Customizing for Define Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

○ You have maintained the Movement Direction for the Activity Type as Check-in Movement in Customizing for Define Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

The location (storage bin type) should be compatible with the TU type. When you save the yard task, the system checks for this compatibility.

NoteYou have maintained the compatibility between the storage bin type and the transportation unit (TU) type in Customizing for Maintain Compatibility of TU Type and Storage Bin Type under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks Location Determination .

In the case of hazardous substances, the destination location determination is based on quantity checks of the product. The system checks the storage bins based on the configuration settings and the quantity of your product.

○ You have specified the following under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SCM Extended Warehouse Management SCM Basis EH&S Services Hazardous Substance Master

Mast. Data Specify Storage Hazards .○ Specified the storage hazard type, for example, SCL under Specify Storage Hazard Types.○ Specified the hazard rating for the storage hazard type under Specify Hazard Ratings.○ Assigned the country and storage hazard number to the storage hazard type under Assign

Storage Hazard to Country/Region.○ You have assigned the storage hazard type to the yard number in Customizing for Assign Storage

Hazard Type for Storage Classes to Yard under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks Location Determination Quantity Checks .

○ You have defined groups of storage classes per yard number in Customizing for Define Storage Class Groups under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard TasksLocation Determination Quantity Checks .

○ You have defined the maximum quantity within storage type and storage section per storage class group. The system checks that the quantity of the product does not exceed the maximum quantity of the determined destination storage type. To maintain this, from the user interface, go to Master Data Dangerous Goods Maintain Maximum Quantity for Storage Type .

116 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Execution

○ Predecessor and SuccessorIf you select the Positioning Type as Sequence (see Assign Visual Object Type to Storage Bin Type [page 39]), you can maintain the predecessor or successor while creating or confirming the yard task. During yard task activation, the system validates the correctness of the predecessor and successor. During yard task confirmation, the TU is inserted in the storage bin based on the predecessor or successor that you have maintained. If you do not maintain the predecessor or successor, the TU that is moved to the storage bin is added at the end of the TU sequence.

● Administrative DataThe system updates the information when you save the task.

● ItemsYou can create the items while creating a yard task and assign them to respective tasks.For more information, see Yard Task - Items [page 123].○ Measurements

You can create a yard task with activity type (movement and non-movement) that requires the task to collect some measurements. To support this in the system, you are provided with measurement yard tasks. The measurement yard tasks are defined in the system for an Activity Type and a Transportation Unit Type. When you create a yard task with the defined yard number, activity type and TU type, the system automatically assigns a set of default Measurement Types to the Measurements section of the item. During yard task execution, you can enter the measurement values into the system. The system checks the measurement values, which are recorded during yard task processing, against the thresholds during goods issue posting. If the measurement value is outside the threshold, the system gives an error and you cannot check-out the yard order For more information on thresholds, see the Threshold section of Yard Order - Items [page 90].

Note○ You have defined the measurement types in Customizing for Define Measurement Types under

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit Measurements .

○ You have maintained the settings to determine the measurement type for a transportation unit type in Customizing for Determine Measurement Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide

Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Unit Measurements .

You can execute the report Pull Data from IoT Cloud [page 52] (optional) to update the TU record types with the measurement values.

○ Seal NumberA seal number is valid only for yard tasks with activity type that requires the task to check-out a yard order to which this item is assigned.You can define the maximum number of seal numbers for a yard number and a TU Type in Customizing for Define Number of Seals under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master DataSettings for Transportation Unit Seal Numbers .For a yard task, you have to maintain at least one seal number for this yard number and TU Type. If you do not maintain the seal number, and you try to check-out the yard order, the system gives an error.

● Handling InstructionsYou can enter any instruction that provides additional details of the task execution to the user.

● Output ManagementThis is based on the Post Processing Framework (PPF). When you Activate or Start a task, the system executes the process in the background. The result of this background processing is displayed in the Output Management section.

SAP Yard LogisticsExecution C U S T O M E R 117

○ You can select an action in Output Management to see the details for the same.○ If an action is unsuccessful, you can Regenerate the action.○ You can manually generate an action, for example, manual printing of the yard task.

● QuestionnaireAnswer all the questions in the Questionnaire section. It is mandatory to answer all the questions before you confirm the yard task. For more information, see Questionnaire [page 155].

● AttachmentsYou can insert any file, folder or link related to this yard task.

5.1.2 Transportation Unit ControlThis function ensures that only one yard order has control over a transportation unit (TU) at any point in time, although a TU can be assigned to an active inbound and an active outbound yard order items simultaneously. The yard order item has a TU Control Flag. If this flag is selected, the yard order item has control over the TU.

● TU control by a yard order item○ An inbound yard order can have control over the TU when you check-in the inbound yard order.

Each TU is unique. Therefore, only one active TU instance for a TU number can exist in a yard. The system performs the uniqueness check during the check-in of an inbound yard order. The check-in of an inbound yard order is possible only if the TUs of the inbound yard order items are not yet active in the yard.

○ An outbound yard order can have control over the TU when you activate the outbound yard order to which the TU is assigned. This can happen only when the TU is not already controlled by another yard order. The check-out of an outbound yard order is possible only if all the TUs of the outbound yard order items are controlled by the yard order or the TUs are without any yard order control.An active outbound yard order item with a TU number defines a TU reservation. A TU reservation is unique per yard, that is, only one active outbound yard order item exists for each TU number. The system performs this check:○ Prior to the activation of outbound yard orders○ During each change of outbound yard order item with TU change, for example, entry of the TU in an

outbound yard order item, TU entry during yard task confirmation○ If there is an active inbound yard order and an active outbound yard order that are using the same TU,

during completion of inbound yard order, the TU control is switched to the outbound yard order automatically.

○ The same TU can be assigned to multiple outbound yard orders, which are in status Planned. However, only one active outbound yard order item can exist for an active TU at any point in time. To enable this, during activation of a yard order, the system checks that the TU of the yard order does not exist in another active outbound yard order item. If this fails, the system gives an error and the activation of the yard order fails. For more information on TU control, see Transportation Unit Control [page 118]

● TU release by a yard order itemA yard order can release control over the TU in the following ways:○ Complete the yard order, that is, the status of the yard order is set to Completed. In the case of an

outbound yard order, you have to check-out the yard order.○ Select the item with the TU that you want to release and select the TU Release option. The system

releases the TU along with all the child TUs in the item hierarchy.

NoteThe TU Release option is activated only when the yard order is in an edit mode.

118 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Execution

The

● TU control during cross dockingThe same TU can be assigned to an inbound yard order and to an outbound yard order. You have to first check-in the inbound yard order and activate the outbound yard order. Then you create the cross docking yard task. In the General section of the yard task screen, you enter the inbound yard order as the Yard Order Number and the outbound yard order as the Destination Yard Order Number under Cross Docking. When you activate this yard task, the TU Control Flag automatically is deselected from the inbound yard order and is selected in the outbound yard order.For more information, see Yard Task Item Hierarchy [page 124].

5.1.3 Maintain Exception Settings

Use

Use this process to define exception codes and the settings associated with them.

By exception, we mean some unexpected situation that may happen in the yard when you are executing yard tasks.

You can assign an exception code to a yard task for the system to execute the settings associated with this exception code in case of an unexpected situation.

ExampleYou receive a task to move a container from one bin to another. When you approach the container, you see that the container is broken. You are expected to raise an exception instead of confirming the yard task.

Process

To execute exceptions in the system, maintain the following activities:

● You can define the exception codes for a yard in Customizing for Define Exception Codes under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .Here, you can also assign an alert type to an exception code. You can use this alert type to trigger an alert that can be checked by a user using the alert monitor. For more information on alert monitors, go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Extended Warehouse Management (select a relevant release, for example) SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.3Application Help . Go to SCM Basis Alert Monitor .

● You can maintain the standard follow-on actions that the system must execute, in case an exception is raised, in Customizing for Maintain Follow-on Actions for Exception Codes under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks . The standard follow-on actions are as follows:○ Block Source Location

The system blocks the source storage bin and you cannot execute any further activity on that storage bin.

SAP Yard LogisticsExecution C U S T O M E R 119

○ Block Destination LocationThe system blocks the destination storage bin and you cannot execute any further activity on that storage bin.

○ Block TUYou cannot execute any further action on the transportation unit.

NoteYou can assign either or both of the following to an exception code:

○ Alert Type○ Standard follow-on action

More Information

Sections of a Yard Task [page 113]

5.1.4 Yard Task Overview

Use

Use this function to generate a list of yard tasks that belong to your yard. You have an overview of the planned tasks for your yard for a certain time frame. From the overview screen, you can:

● Create a new yard task (For more information, see Create a Yard Task [page 121].)● Select a yard task to edit it● Select a yard task to display the details● Select a yard task to make a copy of the same● Select a yard task to delete it● Select a yard task to export the content to a spreadsheet

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Yard Execution Yard Task Overview Yard Tasks .The Yard Task Overview List screen appears.

2. Select the Settings button on the top left side of the screen to maintain user­specific settings, for example, selecting your yard.The system generates a list of yard tasks that belong to your yard.

3. To find your yard task, select the Quick Criteria Maintenance option and enter your yard task number or a range of numbers.

4. Select a yard task to edit, display, copy, delete or export it.

120 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Execution

More Information

SAP Personal Object Worklist Library (POWL)

Go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose Technology Platform SAP NetWeaver (select a relevant release, for example) SAP NetWeaver 7.4 Application Help . Look for SAP Personal Object Worklist Library.

5.1.5 Create a Yard Task

Context

Use this procedure to create a yard task from the user interface.

Procedure

1. From the user interface, go to Yard Execution Yard Task Create Yard Task .

NoteYou can also create a yard task from:

○ The Yard Task Overview List screen. (For more information, see Yard Order Overview [page 87].)○ A yard order:

○ When the Status of the yard order is Planned, you can go to the Task tab and create a yard task.○ When the Status of the yard order is Active, you can go to the Items tab and create a yard task.

You can do this only when you have entered the TU Number for the item.

The Yard <Yard Number>, Create Yard Task screen appears.2. Select the Settings option to change the yard number for which you want to create a yard task.

Note

You have maintained the Yard Number in Customizing for Define Yard Numbers under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Setting up the Yard .

3. Enter the relevant information in the different sections and save the yard task. (For more information, see Sections of a Yard Task [page 113].)

The system automatically assigns a number to the yard task. This is due to the number range customizing. (For more information on number range, see Yard Task [page 112].)

SAP Yard LogisticsExecution C U S T O M E R 121

From this screen, you can select the Edit option. The Cancel Task option gets activated. You can select this option to cancel the task. You can no longer use this task.

4. Once you select the Activate option on the screen, the yard task is activated for execution.

Once you activate the task, you can select the Edit option. The Increase Priority option gets activated. You can select this option to update the planned start time of the task. If you select this option and the yard task is assigned to a queue, the system automatically determines the task with the earliest planned start time. The system maintains the start time for the current task in a way that it is one second earlier and, therefore, the first task in the queue.

5. Once the task is activated, you can select the Start option to indicate that you are starting the processing of the task. The system assigns the actual user to the task.

Once you start the task, you can select the Edit or the Reject option. You can select the Reject option to reject the task in which case the Status of the task is reset to Active. You can again Start the task.

6. Once the task is started, you can select the Confirm option to confirm that the task is completed.

5.1.6 Stacking of Transportation Units on Storage Bins

Use

Use this function to check the stacking and unstacking of transportation units (TUs) on storage bins. When you are creating, activating or confirming a yard task for stacking or unstacking, the system executes some checks. Only if these checks are successful, the system creates, activates or confirms the yard task.

TUs on stackable bins are managed the same as on non-stackable bins using predecessor / successor TU references. A stackable bin can be managed sorted or unsorted. A yard task for a stackable bin is a movement activity. See Assign Visual Object Type to Storage Bin Type [page 39]. You can move TUs out of the stack even if they are not on top of the stack. Using predecessor/successor option in a yard task, you can move a TU into the middle of the stack. On a stackable bin, predecessor means the TU below the current TU and successor means the TU above the current TU. See Sections of a Yard Task [page 113].

Checks while creating a yard task

● The system checks that only one TU (without a hierarchy) is placed at a stack level with one yard task.● The system checks whether the TU is stackable or not. You have maintained the TU Stackable indicator for a

TU type in Customizing for Define Transportation Unit Types under SAP Customizing Implementation GuideYard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Units General Settings .

Checks while activating or confirming a yard task

If any of these checks are unsuccessful, the system gives an error and the yard task does not get activated.

● The system checks the maximum level of stacking for a storage bin type. You have maintained the maximum level of stacking for a storage bin type in Customizing for Define Stacking Storage Bin Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Setting up the Yard Yard Structure .

● The system checks the stacking relation between two TU types, that is, the whether a TU type can be above another TU type. You have maintained the stacking relation between two TU types in Customizing for Define Stacking Relations under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Units Loading and Stacking .

122 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Execution

● The system checks whether the maximum stackable weight that it can take. You have maintained the Max Stackable Weight for a TU type in Customizing for Define Transportation Unit Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Units General Settings .

Only if these checks are successful, the customized TUs can be stacked according to the stacking relations on the marked bin.

Activities

The possible activities are:

● Move-ins, that is, put TU on the bin or stack – A Moving yard task with exactly one TU (yard task item) to the bin (destination)

● Move-outs, that is, take the TU from the bin or stack – A Moving yard task with exactly one TU (yard task item) from the bin (source)

5.1.7 Yard Task - Items

Use

This function enables you to create items and to structure the arriving or departing transportation unit (TU).

ExampleTrain items can be the locomotive and the railcars attached to it. Each railcar can contain one or more container. Each item has a TU type, for example, truck, locomotive, railcar, container.

Prerequisites

You have defined the TU types and how a TU type is used in yard processes in Customizing for Define Transportation Unit Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Master DataSettings for Transportation Unit General Settings .

Features

● You can maintain the child to parent relationship between items.● You can assign an icon type to a TU type in Customizing. The system displays this icon against an item

associated with this TU type. Else, the system displays a default icon for the item.● Activity Category of a yard task influences the yard item input behavior. The system determines the scenario

that is executed based on the value of this field.

SAP Yard LogisticsExecution C U S T O M E R 123

● You can only create non-grouping items from a yard task. A yard task can use the grouping items created through a yard request or a yard order. For more on grouping items, see Yard Order - Items [page 90].Non-grouping ItemsThese are physical objects in the yard. Non-grouping items can be of the following types:○ Carrying items: Other items can be loaded on to these items. Mostly, such items are movable, actively or

passively, for example, trucks, trailers, locomotives, rail cars.○ Loading items: Items that can be loaded on top of other items, for example, containers. The most

complex case for yard order creation are piggyback transports. For example, trucks that enter a yard and then are loaded onto railcars. Here, the truck is a carrying item but is also a loading item when it is loaded onto the rail car.

● You can view the Source Parent TU, Destination Parent TU and Transportation Unit if they are assigned to the yard task item. To do so, select the item row and then select the TU Details button. Choose the TU document that you want to display.

● You can implement the Business Add-in /SAPYL/YT_LOAD_SCHEME to enhance the determination and validation of the loading scheme before saving of the yard task. You can implement this BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Yard Task Loading Scheme Enhancement (Determination + Validation) under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Units .

Activities

To create an item and a subitem (See Yard Task Item Hierarchy [page 124]):

1. Go to the yard task.2. Select the Items option.3. Select New.4. Enter the relevant information for the item.5. Create a subitem for an item, if required. To create a subitem:

6. Select an item. Then choose New Subitem .7. Enter the relevant information for the subitem and save your entries.

To create a list of items via the group:

1. Go to the yard task.2. Select the Add Group option.3. Enter the relevant information for the item and subitems.

5.1.7.1 Yard Task Item Hierarchy

When adding items to the yard task item hierarchy tree, you can execute the following actions:

● You can add a single item including all subitems, for example, move a truck including all loaded containers through the yard.

● You can add a sequence of items, that is, yard order top-level items, for example, move a whole train from one rail track to another rail track.

124 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Execution

● You can add a group of items, that is, yard order grouping items or TU groups, for example, move a whole consist of rail cars to another rail track.

From this view, you can delete subitems from a yard task item hierarchy to allow for a temporary movement of items without its subitems. For example, take a truck for cleaning without its loaded container. This means that the item is still a part of the yard order but not a part of the yard task.

Items of a yard task are not identical to items of the yard order. However, they are still linked. For the item of a yard task, you can see that the Yard Order Item Number field has the same Item No. as that of the yard order item.

The yard task item hierarchy can be created in the following ways:

● Planned yard tasks with yard order reference – You can create a yard task from a yard order and assign the items from the yard order.

● Unplanned yard tasks with yard order reference – You can create a yard task from the yard task creation screen and enter the yard order number

● Unplanned yard tasks without yard order reference – You can create a yard task from the yard task creation screen without any reference yard order number

Cross Docking of Items Between Two Yard Orders

The same item can be a part of an inbound yard order and it can be a part of an outbound yard order. You have to first check-in the inbound yard order and activate the outbound yard order. Then you create the cross docking yard task. In the General section of the yard task screen, you enter the inbound yard order as the Yard Order Number and the outbound yard order as the Destination Yard Order Number under Cross Docking. When you activate this yard task, the TU Control Flag automatically is deselected from the inbound yard order and gets selected in the outbound yard order.

Simple Cross Docking between two orders

● First yard order reference is YO1● Destination yard order reference is YO2

Item Hierarchy Yard Order Item Number

Source Parent TU Transportation Unit Destination Yard Order Item Number

Destination Parent TU

TRCK 10 MAN777 30

→CNTR 20 MAN777 TALU221036 40

When you enter the Yard Order Item Number as 10, the system derives the hierarchy from the yard order hierarchy in YO1. A subitem 20 was inserted by the existing hierarchy in YO1 below item 10. When you enter the target items 30, 40, the system executes a number of checks:

● The destination item hierarchy has to have the same structure as the source item structure.● There are two possibilities regarding the destination items:

○ The destination items have a TU number assigned, then the TU number has to be the same as those in the TU column.

○ The destination items have no TU number assigned, then the system checks the basic properties for compliance between the TU and the destination item definition.

Complex Cross Docking Between Two Orders

SAP Yard LogisticsExecution C U S T O M E R 125

Item Hierarchy Yard Order Item Number

Source Parent TU Transportation Unit Destination Yard Order Item Number

Destination Parent TU

TRAN (Group) 10 10

→RLCR 20 31816650286 20

→→CNTR 30 31816650286 TALU221036 30

→CONS (Group) 40 Trainsection1 40

→→RLCR 50 31816650287 31816650287 50

→→→CNTR 60 31816650287 TALU221037 60

→→→CNTR 70 31816650287 TALU221038 70

→→RLCR 80 31816650288 80

→→→CNTR 90 31816650288 TALU221039 90

The destination part of the yard task item hierarchy is non-editable when the activity type is non-movement. If grouping items are part of the yard order hierarchy definition, then they are also taken over into the yard task hierarchy. There can be several grouping items at different levels. The entire hierarchy, including grouping items, can be mapped to items of the destination yard order. In the above example, in the case of a train, the item numbers in source and destination order are identical.

5.2 Plan Transportation Unit Pick-Up

Use

Use this function to execute the following functions:

● Reserve a transportation unit (TU) for an item of an outbound yard order● Release TUs from inbound yard orders● Create a yard task for a TU● Create a yard task for a yard order or an item

The screen has two areas:

● Transportation Unit (TU) area – Here, you can search for the TUs. The system displays the list of active TUs in a TU hierarchy. An active TU is one that has been checked-in with a yard order and is not yet checked-out. The system derives the TU hierarchy based on the item hierarchy when you check-in the yard order.○ If the item hierarchy has a grouping item, the TU hierarchy also has the grouping TU. For more information

on item hierarchy, see Item Hierarchy [page 69]○ If a TU is reserved for a yard order, you can see the yard order number for the TU.○ This area has a Filter by Classifications option. The filter values are derived from the yard order item

marked in the yard order tree on the right side of the transaction. Only if this option is set to Selected,

126 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Execution

the TU search considers the yard order item classification for TU reservation. If the yard order item holds a TU classification, this option is automatically set to Selected. You can manually reset the option to Not Selected. Once you select the Not Selected option, you get all the TU reservation options that are suitable to the yard order item as per master data only and not as per classification. You are provided with the Business Add-in /SAPYL/CLASSIFICATION_VAL to decide the behavior of the system in such a case. You are provided with an implementation of the BAdI that allows you to reserve such a TU for the yard order item but the system gives a warning message. This means that not all classification data are compatible between the item and TU. You can create your own implementation of the BAdI to have some other behavior, for example, raise an error message and abort the reservation of TU if not all classification data are compatible between the item and TU. You can implement the BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Classification Validation under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order .For more information on Classification Data, see Yard Order - Items [page 90].

● Yard Order area – Here, you can search for the outbound yard orders. As per your search criteria, the system displays the active outbound yard orders and the item hierarchy for each yard order.○ The first level is the yard order number and under that yard order, you can see the items and subitems as

per the item hierarchy.○ For an item, if a TU is reserved, you can see the TU for the item. If there is no TU reserved for an item, you

can reserve a TU for the item. Select a yard order item to display all the TU reservation options.

Features

● In both the TU and the yard order areas, you can create variants and save them as your default queries. You can do this by selecting the drop-downs next to the Standard option.

● In both the TU and the yard order areas, you have the Filters option. This is a link, which outputs all possible search attributes.

● In case of certain selection criteria, the system does not consider the grouping items for yard order selection, for example, if the selection criteria is TU is empty, the system does not select any grouping items as they are no real TUs but only used for organizational purposes.

● When a user selects/marks a yard order item, the system updates and executes the TU search according to the master data attributes from the selected yard order item (TU Type, Means of Transport and Packaging Material). The used TU selection criteria is displayed in the TU filter area so that the user can adjust the selection criteria manually, if required.

● Even if an active inbound yard order has TU Control Flag set for a TU, you assign the TU to an outbound yard order.

● In both the TU and the yard order areas, you can:○ Search for the TUs or the yard order items○ Save the list layouts as variants and default variants using the Personalization option.○ Export the lists to spreadsheets

Activities

From the user interface, go to Yard Execution Pick-Up Planning Plan Transportation Unit Pick-Up .

SAP Yard LogisticsExecution C U S T O M E R 127

Reserve TUs for Outbound Yard Order Item

You can reserve a TU from the Transportation Unit area for an item from the Yard Order area.

● The outbound item should not have any TU reserved for it.● The TU that you want to reserve for an item should not be reserved for any outbound yard order.

To reserve a TU for a yard order item:

1. Select the Edit button on the top of the screen.2. From the Transportation Unit area, select the TU that you want to reserve for the item.3. From the Yard Order area, select the item or the subitem for which you want to reserve the TU.4. You can reserve the selected TU for the selected item in the following ways:

○ Drag-and-drop the TU to the item and vice-versa.○ Manually by selecting the Reserve TU button at the TU tree list toolbar when you have selected the TU and

the item.○ Free TU number reservation - Select a yard order item and then click the Reserve TU button from the yard

order tree list toolbar.The system reserves the TU for the item. You can now see the TU for the item on the Yard Order area. You can see the yard order number, inbound or outbound status of the yard order, and the item number for the TU on the Transportation Unit area.

Release TUs from Inbound Yard Orders

In the TU area, if there is a TU that is reserved for an item in an inbound yard order, you can release the TU from that yard order.

If the TU is reserved for a yard task that is still open, that is, not yet in status Confirmed, the system will not release the TU.

To release TUs from inbound yard orders:

1. Select the TU from the Transportation Unit area.2. Select the TU Release button and select the Save button.

The system releases the TU from the yard order. You can now see the Yard Order Number field blank for the TU. You can now reserve this TU for another yard order.

Create a Yard Task for a TU

You can select a TU and create a yard task for the TU.

You can create a yard task for a grouping item or an actual TU.

To create a yard task for a TU:

1. Select the TU from the Transportation Unit area.2. Select the Create Task button.

The Create Yard Task screen appears.○ In the Items tab of the new yard task, you can see an item with this TU reserved for the item. If you want,

you can delete this item. You can create new items.○ If the TU is reserved for a yard order, in the General tab of the new yard task, you can see this yard order

number as the Yard Order Number.○ In the Items tab of the new yard task, you can see the item hierarchy for this TU. You can delete any of the

items from the hierarchy. You can also create new items.3. Enter the required information and save the yard task. For more information, see Yard Task [page 112].

128 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Execution

Create a Yard Task for a Yard Order or an Item

You can select a yard order or an item to create a yard task.

The status of the yard order has to be Active.

To create a yard task for a yard order or an item:

1. Select the yard order or an item from the Yard Order area.2. Select the Create Task button.

The Create Yard Task screen appears.3. Enter the required information and save the yard task. For more information, see Yard Order - Tasks [page

102].In the Items tab of the new yard task, you can see the item hierarchy for this yard order or item. If you want, you can delete an item. You can create new items.In the General tab of the new yard task, you can see this yard order number as the Yard Order Number.

SAP Yard LogisticsExecution C U S T O M E R 129

6 Yard Mobile Operations

Use

You use this component:

● For the driver of the vehicle to do a self check-in of the yard order at the gate● To execute yard tasks using the SAP Fiori Launchpad

The Fiori UI can be executed on any device – mobile or a desktop – using the Fiori Client application or the web browser.

More Information

● Self Check-In [page 131]● Yard Task Execution [page 132]● Yard Task [page 112]● SAP Fiori Launchpad [page 130]

6.1 SAP Fiori Launchpad

Use

The Fiori UI can be executed on any device – mobile or a desktop – using the Fiori Client application or the web browser. You can execute the following actions from the Fiori UI or the web browser:

● Self Check-In [page 131]● Yard Task Execution [page 132]

130 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Yard Mobile Operations

6.1.1 Self Check-In

A driver of the vehicle can use this application to check-in the yard order when he/she arrives at the gate of the yard.

Prerequisites

● Maintain the user for each checkpoint of the yard. As not every driver will have a system user, you can maintain a single user for all the drivers. To do so, from the user interface, go to Settings Self Check-In Maintain User for Self Check-In per Checkpoint . For more information, see Maintain User for Self Check-In per Checkpoint [page 160].

● As the drivers speak different languages, you can configure the self check-in to support various languages, indicated by flags when you start the transaction. To support this functionality, define per supported language the Icon ID and assign the country, language and MIME URL for the flag. Depending on your configuration, the system displays the self check-in application in the corresponding languages with the country flags for the different countries. You can do this in Customizing for Define Icon IDs and Assign Country, Language, MIME URL for Country Flags under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order Self Check-In .

● Assign the Icon IDs to the specific checkpoints of a yard. Depending on this Customizing, the system builds the language selection screen for the self check-in application and the corresponding buttons are placed in the customized sequence. You can do this in Customizing for Assign Icon IDs to Checkpoint under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order Self Check-In .

● In order to identify a business document, relevant for check-in, the system supports flexible search options using reference document types. Define the reference types that are used in the self check-in application to search for the yard order document. Reference type can be a customer­specific document or any other document. You can see these search options on the self check-in application. You can do this in Customizing for Define Document Type for Self Check-In under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard LogisticsYard Request and Yard Order Self Check-In .

● Maintain the settings for the questionnaire. For more information, see Questionnaire [page 155].

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Yard Operations SAP Fiori Launchpad .2. Select the Self Check-In option.

The application displays the various languages in which you can view the application.3. Select the appropriate language.

The Self Check-In screen appears.4. You can search for the yard order based on the following selection options:

○ Yard Request○ Yard Order○ Transportation Unit Number

SAP Yard LogisticsYard Mobile Operations C U S T O M E R 131

NoteYou can configure further search options, for example, Freight Order, Appointment. You can do so in Customizing for Define Document Type for Self Check-In under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order Self Check-In .

5. Select the appropriate yard order.6. Enter the driver, vehicle information and the telephone number in the Additional Information section. The

SCAC field uniquely identifies a carrier. If you have entered the information while creating the yard order, the same information is defaulted here.Go to the next step.The Item Details screen appears with an information message.

7. Select Enter Item Details.The Item Details screen appears.

8. Enter the information for each of the items of the yard order.

NoteYou can enter only the details for those items that you have maintained in the Customizing activity Assign Label and Identification for Self Check-In Item Details under SAP Customizing Implementation GuideYard Logistics Yard Request and Yard Order Self Check-In Assign Label and Identification for Self Check-In Item Details . Here, you can specify the label of the input field for each item detail, depending on its type.

If questionnaires are configured for the yard order, go to the next step. Else, select the Summary option.If you go to the next step, the Questionnaire screen appears.

9. Answer all the questions in the Questionnaire. If you have filled­in the questionnaire while creating the yard order, the same information is defaulted here. It is mandatory to answer all the questions before you check-in the yard order. For more information, see Questionnaire [page 155].

10. Select the Summary option.11. To check-in the yard order, select the Submit option.

6.1.2 Yard Task Execution

The system assigns the yard tasks for mobile execution to a queue. You are assigned to one or multiple queues to fetch yard tasks for execution. You can work on only one yard task at a time.

The application supports the following modes:

● Queue modeIn Queue mode, the system loads the yard tasks from the queue that you are assigned to and you get the next task in the queue automatically. The queues have a unique priority. Hence, you can view only one task at a time. Once you confirm this task, the application determines the next yard task available for you depending on the queue priority. If the application cannot determine any such task, the UI informs you and stays in an automatic refresh mode until a yard task can be displayed.

● Manual Selection modeIn Manual Selection mode, the application displays all the tasks with status as Active or In Process for the yard and handling resource that you have selected. You can choose a yard task or search for yard tasks that

132 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Yard Mobile Operations

you want to execute. At the top of the list, there is a search control, which allows you to search for the yard task. In this mode, once you confirm a yard task, you will return to the list of tasks. You can choose another yard task.

Features

● When you log on to the application for the first time, the Choose Parameters popup appears. Here, you can select a yard and a handling resource. The application displays the yard tasks based on this selection. You can

change your selection at any point in time. To do so, click button at the bottom left corner of the screen.● In the Queue mode, the Choose Parameters popup displays the Value Timeout. This is the number of seconds,

after which, the system refreshes the queue. If you do not execute any action on the yard task, the following may happen:○ Another yard task of higher priority may come in your queue and the system opens this yard task. Then

the old yard task will go down in your queue.○ Someone else starts working on the yard task and the system removes this yard task from your queue and

opens the next task.● After you select the yard and the handling resource during the first login, and subsequently when you logon to

the application, the application prompts you to select either the Queue mode or the Manual Selection mode. As per your selection, the application displays the yard task(s) with the detailed view of the task. You can change your selection by clicking the Home button on the top left side of the screen.

Sections of the yard task detailed view

● Task ListIn Queue mode, the application opens the yard task in the queue and in Manual Selection mode, displays the yard task list.

● Task Object HeaderContains the basic information about yard task: source type, source section, source location, destination type, destination section, destination location.

● Overview tabLists the source and destination locations of the parent transportation unit (TU), destination level and position, handling instructions, list of TUs with their details

● Pictures tabDisplays the picture that you have uploaded with its details. You can edit the details of the picture or you can delete the picture from here.

● Checks tabAnswer all the questions in the Checks tab. If you have filled­in the questionnaire while creating the yard task, the same information is defaulted here. It is mandatory to answer all the questions. For more information, see Questionnaire [page 155].

● Measurements tabDisplays the recorded Measurements. The Measurement Types that are displayed are derived from the Customizing. You can enter the Value for a Measurement Type and save your entries.

● Seals tabIf sealing is required, you enter the Seal Number for a TU and save your entries. The system reads the requested number of seals from the Customizing settings.

● TU Details tab

SAP Yard LogisticsYard Mobile Operations C U S T O M E R 133

Displays the list of TUs assigned to the yard task in a TU hierarchy. You can select the level of hierarchy that you want to view for a TU. If an item does not have a TU assigned to it, you can assign a TU to the item and save your entries.

● Exceptions tab● Action buttons at the footer bar

○ Start – Allocates and starts the task. Sets the status of the yard task to In Process.○ Reject – Pushes the yard task back into the queue. The status of the task is reset to Active. You can again

Start the task.○ Confirm – Confirms the current task. In Queue mode, the application opens the next task and in Manual

Selection mode, displays the yard task list.○ Set Exception – Select the three dots at the bottom right side of the screen and select Set Exception. A list

of exceptions appear. Select the appropriate exception. The status of the task changes to Cancelled. In Queue mode, the application opens the next task and in Manual Selection mode, displays the yard task list.

○ Take a Picture – Select the three dots at the bottom right side of the screen and select Take a Picture. If you are using a mobile, you will get the option to select a picture from your gallery or to take a picture. If you are using a desktop, you will get the option to select a picture.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Yard Operations SAP Fiori Launchpad .2. Select the Queue mode or the Manual Selection mode.

As per your selection, the application displays the yard task(s) with the detailed view of the task. You can change your selection by clicking the Home button on the top left side of the screen.

NoteWhen you log on to the application for the first time, you are prompted to select a yard and a handling resource. The application displays the yard tasks based this selection. You can change your selection at any

point in time. To do so, click button at the bottom left corner of the screen.

3. Enter the relevant information and execute the appropriate action.

More Information

● Queue Management [page 30]● Handling Resources [page 27]● Questionnaire [page 155]

134 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Yard Mobile Operations

7 Yard Monitoring

This component allows you to monitor the yard via the following functions:

● Launch Yard Cockpit [page 135]● Display Loading Appointment List [page 137]● Transportation Unit Overview [page 137]● Maintain Yard Transportation Unit [page 139]● Display Fire Department List [page 142]● Alert Monitor

For information on alert monitors, go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Supply Chain Management select a relevant release, for example, SAP SCM 7.0 EHP3 Application Help . Go to SCM Basis Alert Monitor .

7.1 Launch Yard Cockpit

Use

Use this function to visualize the yard and to execute some functions on the yard. You can view the yard cockpit in the following modes:

● GeoMap mode● Schematic mode

In the yard cockpit screen, you have the:

● Graphical display - Form here, you can view the yard cockpit in either Schematic View or GeoMap view.● Lists around the graphical display - From here, you can search for the yard orders, yard tasks, alerts, handling

resources, and transportation units.

Features

● You can execute the following functions from the graphical display:○ Display storage bins on the yard

You get the following options when you right-click an empty storage bin:○ Details – Select this option to display the details of the storage bin like the storage bin ID, storage bin

type, storage type, storage section, length, width of the storage bin. You can implement the Business Add-in /SAPYL/SBIN_VO_DETAILS to configure the details that the system should display. You can implement this BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Visual Object Details for Storage Bin under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard LogisticsMaster Data Master Data .

SAP Yard LogisticsYard Monitoring C U S T O M E R 135

○ Block for incoming movements – If you select this option, the system blocks the storage bin and you cannot bring in a TU to this storage bin.

○ Block for outgoing movements – If you select this option, the system blocks the storage bin and you cannot take out a TU from this storage bin.

○ Block storage bin – If you select this option, the system blocks the storage bin and you cannot carry out any task on this storage bin.

○ Display the TUs in the storage bins○ The scale of TUs in Yard Visualization is based on:

○ Capacity and length of the storage bin – In 3D layout, the scale of each storage bin is calculated separately based on the start and end point of a storage bin and its actual capacity and length.

○ Actual size of the TU packaging material○ You get the following options when you right-click a storage bin with a TU:

○ Details – Select this option to display the details of the storage bin. You can implement the Business Add-in /SAPYL/TU_VO_DETAILS to configure the details that the system should display. You can implement this BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Visual Object Details for Transportation Unit under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics Master Data Master Data .

○ Update TU - Select this option to display the transportation unit document.○ Set General Block or Remove General Block – If you select Set General Block, the system blocks

the TU and you cannot execute any task on this TU. You have to select Remove General Block to execute any task on the TU.

○ Yard Tasks – Select this option to display the yard tasks to which this TU is assigned. Select a yard task to open it in a separate window.

○ From yard cockpit, you can drag and drop a TU from one storage bin to another. When you do a drag and drop, the system prompts you to create a yard task to move the TU from one storage bin to another. You can enter the following details for the yard task:○ Activity Type○ Yard Order Number○ Yard Task Queue○ Date○ Time○ Immediate Confirmation indicator○ Immediate Activation indicator○ Predecessor – Displays the predecessor documents, for example, yard request or yard order to which

this TU is assigned.○ Successor – Displays the successor documents, for example, yard tasks that have to be executed for

this TU.For more information on entering information for yard tasks, see Sections of a Yard Task [page 113].

● You can execute the following functions from the lists around the graphical display:○ Under the Yard Overview section, you can maintain filters.○ Under the Orders section, you can search for the yard orders and yard tasks.

○ Yard Order – For a yard order, you can create tasks.○ Yard Task

○ You can display and edit a yard task from the search result.○ You can create a yard task.

○ Under the Alerts section, you can search for the alerts. See Alert Handling [page 143].

136 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Yard Monitoring

○ Under the Resources section, you can search for the handling resources. The system displays the handling resources assigned to this yard as per your search criteria. See Handling Resources [page 27].

○ Under the Transportation Unit section, you can search for the TUs. You can click a TU to navigate to the document. See Display Yard Transportation Unit [page 139].

Activities

● From the user interface, go to Yard Monitoring Launch Yard Cockpit .The Yard Cockpit screen appears.

● From the lists next to the graphical display, you can search for the yard orders, yard tasks, and alerts.● From the graphical display side of the screen, you can view the yard cockpit in either Schematic View or

GeoMap view.● Select the Settings option on the top left side of the screen to edit the following:

○ Yard Number – You can change the yard number to view the cockpit for a different yard.○ Visual Business Visualization Mode – You can view the yard in a Schematic View or GeoMap view.○ Visual Yard Full Screen Mode indicator – Select this indicator to see the yard cockpit, that is, the graphical

display in full screen mode.○ Flatten Buildings indicator – Select this indicator to switch­off the 3-D mode for buildings.

7.2 Display Loading Appointment List

You use this function to search for the loading appointments from a specific yard based on certain search criteria.

From the loading appointment screen, you can:

● Search for an appointment based on the value of some fields.● View the appointments in the Loading Appointments Overview List.● View the details associated with the appointment.● Click an appointment number to display the document.● Click the yard order number, if any, associated with the appointment to display the yard order document.● Click the means of transport ID associated with the appointment to display the TU document.

7.3 Transportation Unit Overview

Use

Use this function to search for the active transportation units (TUs) based on certain search criteria. From the overview screen, you can:

● Search for a TU based on the value of some fields.

SAP Yard LogisticsYard Monitoring C U S T O M E R 137

● View the TUs in the Results List.● Click a TU number to display the document.● Click the inbound or outbound yard order number, if any, associated with the TU to display the yard order.● Select a TU to:

○ Create a yard task for the TU.○ Update the Loading Weight of the TU.○ Update Loading Scheme for the TU.○ Block / Unblock the TU.

● Select a TU to display the following for the TU below the Results List:○ Content – When the TU arrives at the yard, the product is visible in the Content tab.○ Status of the TU. The system displays all the statuses that are possible for the TUs. The system marks the

status that is applicable for the selected TU with a green tick.○ Details of the Yard Order associated with the TU. You can select the Yard Order Number to display the

document.○ Details of Yard Tasks associated with the TU. You can select the Yard Task Number to display the

document. You can also select the Yard Order Number to display the document.○ Content History – When the TU arrives at the yard, the product is visible in the Content tab. When the TU

leaves the yard and comes back again, then this product is visible in Content History tab and the new product that is valid for the second time is visible in the Content tab.

○ ThresholdThe limits of a threshold are used to validate TU measurements. If the TU measurement is not within the threshold limits, the system raises an alert (as defined in the threshold).When you check-in an inbound yard order or activate an outbound yard order with thresholds for an item, the system copies the thresholds to the TU assigned to the item. After this, you cannot edit the thresholds for the TU of an item.If you select a TU where the TU control is not set and no active task exists, you can add or delete thresholds for this TU.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Yard Monitoring Overview Transportation Unit .The Transportation Unit Overview List screen appears.

2. Search for a TU based on different fields.The system displays a list of TUs under the Results List section based on your search criteria.

3. Select a TU to display the document.4. Select a TU and select the Create Task button to create a new yard task for the TU.

○ In the Items tab of the new yard task, you can see an item with this TU assigned to the item. If you want, you can delete this item. You can create new items.

○ If the TU is assigned to a yard order, in the General tab of the new yard task, you can see this yard order number as the Yard Order Number.

○ In the Items tab of the new yard task, you can see the item hierarchy for this TU. You can delete any of the items from the hierarchy. You can also create new items.

5. Select a TU and select the Update Weight button to update the loading weight of the TU.6. Select a TU to display the details of the Content, Status, Yard Order, Yard Tasks associated with the TU.

138 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Yard Monitoring

More Information

Display Yard Transportation Unit [page 139]

7.4 Maintain Yard Transportation Unit

Use

Use this function to display and maintain the transportation unit (TU) for a yard with its details.

Features

You can view the following details for the TU:

● TU Header Details

NoteIf a TU enters a yard the first time, it is created based on the information from request/yard order item. Master data for this TU, like country of registration, license plate number or additional external identification are stored in the TU when you save the request/yard order for the first time. You, however, can edit these fields in this transaction even if the TU is active. The changes are, however, not reflected in the request/yard order.

Archiving Status - The Archiving Status of a yard transportation unit is Not Archived. When you run the preprocessing archiving report using transaction SARA, the Archiving Status changes to In Process.

● Administrative Data● Status of the TU – The system displays all the statuses that are possible for the TUs. The system marks the

status that is applicable for the selected TU with a green tick.● Measurement

You can create a yard task with activity type that requires the task to collect some measurements for a TU. (For more information, see the Measurements section of Sections of a Yard Task [page 113].) You can also delete the measurement record from the TU.Here, the system displays the recorded Measurements. You cannot create or edit an entry. You, however, can delete an entry logically but not physically. The system sets the Deletion Flag indicator for the entry. This logical deletion serves two purposes. Firstly, it supports check-out scenario. Imagine a scenario where a threshold was validated and the check-out is not possible. Now, you align with the recipient to ship the goods anyways. In this case, based on the deletion functionality, you can remove the threshold and re-trigger the check-out posting. Secondly, the logical deletion supports the traceability of changes scenario. Due to the logical deletion, you can still see what was the old threshold and who has deleted it.

● Seal NumberHere, you can only view the seal numbers that are maintained for a TU. A seal number is valid only for TUs assigned to outbound yard orders. For more information on seal numbers, see Yard Order - Items [page 90].

SAP Yard LogisticsYard Monitoring C U S T O M E R 139

● TU Hierarchy – The system displays the TU hierarchy for the current TU. The system displays all the TUs in a hierarchy under the current TU. The system derives the TU hierarchy based on the item hierarchy when you check-in the yard order. (See Item Hierarchy [page 69].) You can select a TU to display the document.

● Sequence – This enables you to know which TU is located where in the yard. Depending on the yard type (rail, truck), the location of a TU can be a parking area, a geo position, and so on. To make the TU accessible, it is important to know the surroundings of a TU, for example, the other TUs that are also located on a rail track and their sequence. Therefore, the solution displays all the TUs that are preceding and succeeding the current TU on the same storage bin. Preceding TUs are the ones that are assigned before the current TU in the storage bin. Succeeding TUs are the ones that are assigned after the current TU in the storage bin. The system, however, does not display this tab for child TUs, for example, container that is loaded onto a truck. You can select a TU to display the document.

NoteOnly if the Positioning Type for the storage bin type is maintained as Sequence, the Sequence tab is visible on the TU screen. For further information, see Assign Visual Object Type to Storage Bin Type [page 39].

● Content History – When the TU arrives at the yard, the product is visible in the Content tab. When the TU leaves the yard and comes back again, then this product is visible in Content History tab and the new product that is valid for the second time is visible in the Content tab. The system enters the content history also if the content is changed during processing in the yard, either manually or automatically, triggered from a subsystem such as the EWM system.

● Content – You can maintain content for a transportation unit if there is no yard task assigned to the transportation unit that has status either Active or In Process.○ When you check-in an inbound yard order, the system copies the content of the yard order to the

associated transportation unit.○ When you activate an outbound yard order, the system does not copy the content to the associated

transportation unit. When you check-out an outbound yard order, the system copies the content from the transportation unit to the outbound yard order.

● DimensionsYou can edit the Loading Weight if there is no active yard task assigned to the TU and there is no entry in the Content tab. If there is an entry in the Content tab, the system adds up the weight of the contents and displays it as the Loading Weight.

● Loading SchemeYou can edit the Loading Layout for the parent item only if the current TU does not have any child TU. You can edit the Positioning for a child item.

NoteYou can implement the Business Add-in /SAPYL/YTU_LOADING_SCHEME to enhance the determination and validation of the loading scheme before saving of the transportation unit. You can implement this BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Yard TU Loading Scheme Enhancement (Determination + Validation) under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics Master Data Settings for Transportation Units .

● Classification DataThe classification data for TUs is used during TU determination. You can edit the classification data values from here.For more information, see Yard Order - Items [page 90].

● Threshold

140 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Yard Monitoring

The limits of a threshold are used to validate TU measurements. If the TU measurement is not within the threshold limits, the system raises an alert (as defined in the threshold). You can maintain the threshold record with the values for a yard order.When you check-in an inbound yard order or activate an outbound yard order with thresholds for an item, the system copies the thresholds to the TU assigned to the item. After this, you cannot edit the thresholds for the TU of an item.From the TU document, you can create a new threshold entry for the TU. You can also delete an entry logically but not physically, if the TU Control indicator is not set for the TU in any yard request or a yard order. The system sets the Deletion Flag indicator for the entry.

● Yard TaskThe system displays the yard tasks to which the TUs are assigned. From here, you can navigate to the corresponding yard task and the yard order documents.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Yard Monitoring Display Yard Transportation Unit .The Display Transportation Unit screen appears where you have to enter the TU that you want to view.

2. Select the Settings option to enter the yard number for which you want to display the TU.3. Enter the Transportation Unit that you want to view and select the Continue button.

The Display Transportation Unit screen appears where you can view the details of the TU.

More Information

Transportation Unit Overview [page 137]

7.4.1 Cleaning of Transportation Unit

You use this function to execute the cleaning of the transportation unit (TU).

Prerequisites

You have defined the Activity Type as cleaning relevant and set the Cleaning Activiy Type indicator in Customizing for Define Activity Types under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

SAP Yard LogisticsYard Monitoring C U S T O M E R 141

Features

● The system automatically sets the TU Cleaned indicator if a cleaning yard task is confirmed.● If the TU is not cleaned, you can manually uncheck the TU Cleaned indicator for the TU in the TU Header

Details section.● The TU Cleaned indicator for the TU in the TU Header Details section is checked if the TU is cleaned. You can

check the indicator manually. It can also be automatically checked via the yard task confirmation.

Following are some of the scenarios:

● For an item in an inbound yard order, the TU Cleaned indicator is unchecked. The item is assigned to a yard task with activity type as cleaning. In this case, you can see the TU Cleaned indicator for the TU in the TU Header Details section is unchecked. Once the cleaning yard task is executed, the TU Cleaned indicator for the TU is checked.

● For an item in a yard order, the TU Cleaned indicator is checked. In this case, you can see the TU Cleaned indicator for the TU in the TU Header Details section also is checked.

● For an item in an outbound yard order, the TU Cleaned indicator is checked. This means that the yard order cannot be checked out if the TU is not cleaned. In this case, you can see the TU Cleaned indicator for the TU in the TU Header Details section is unchecked. You have to assign the item to a yard task with activity type as cleaning. Once the cleaning yard task is executed, the TU Cleaned indicator for the TU is checked and you can check-out the yard order.

7.5 Display Fire Department List

You use this function to determine the products stored in the transportation units in the yard. The result contains product lines - the number of rows is equal to the number of products that the TU contains. Only products that do not have empty quantity, volume or weight are displayed. This is used for fire department reporting.

From the overview screen, you can:

● From the Display only HazMat/DG Products drop-down, choose:○ Selected, if you want to display only TUs that contain HazMat/DG Products.○ Not Selected or leave the drop-down empty, if you want to display TUs containing any product.

● Search for TUs based on the value of some fields.● Click a TU number to display the document.● Click the inbound or outbound yard order number, if any, associated with the TU to display the yard order.

142 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Yard Monitoring

7.6 Alert Monitor

Use

You use this function to raise alerts in the case of time deviations for a yard. The time deviation could relate to one of the following business objects of the yard:

● Yard request● Yard order● Yard task● Transportation unit

You also use this function to monitor alerts if any thresholds were overruled by measurement values during yard task confirmation.

When you define a threshold, either in the yard order item or in the TU directly, you can enter an alert type and a priority. The system takes this into account for the display of the alerts.

Prerequisites

● You can assign an alert type to an exception code. You can use this alert type to trigger an alert that can be checked by a user using the alert monitor. You can do this in Customizing for Define Exception Codes under

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

● You must maintain the settings in Customizing for Maintain Exceeding Dates under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Yard Tasks .

Activities

The Time Based Alerts Mass Processing (/SAPYL/TIME_BASED_ALERTS_MASS) report runs periodically, depending on the frequency at which you have scheduled it in the system. The report analyses all the business objects in the yard, for example, transportation units, yard orders. The report calls the alert class that does the validations. If the validation of the alert class reports that the business object is valid for an alert, the report raises the corresponding alert.

Example

ExampleA container is standing in the yard for more than 24 hours because someone has forgotten to move it. In this case, we need to define time based exceptions and checks for the container.

SAP Yard LogisticsYard Monitoring C U S T O M E R 143

See Also

For more information on Alert Monitoring, see the Master Guide for SAP Yard Logistics.

144 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Yard Monitoring

8 Billing

Use

In the SAP Yard Logistics system, you can record the quantity of yard services used for the services agreed upon in an agreement in the SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) system. You can subsequently send this quantity information back to the SAP TM system for charge calculation and settlement based on the charges you have agreed to in the agreement. This enables you to perform the following:

● Sell yard services to customers and bill the customers periodically based the services used for a time period.● Purchase yard services from external service providers and self-bill periodically to pay the service provider

based on the yard services used for a time period. The function is utilizing the warehouse billing functionality of SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM). However, as a major restriction, SAP Yard Logistics supports only billing of yard tasks.For more information on SAP EWM warehouse billing, go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Extended Warehouse Management (select a relevant release, for example) SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.3 Application Help . Go to SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) Warehouse Billing .

Integration

For more information on receiving agreement data and sending quantity information to the SAP TM system, see SAP Library for SAP Transportation Management on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/tm . In SAP Library, choose SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) Integration Direct Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management Warehouse Billing .

Features

You can use the following features in Yard Logistics for yard billing:

● Snapshot ManagementThis enables you to periodically calculate the SAP Yard Logistics business data relevant for measuring the Yard services used and to determine the quantity of Yard services used.For more information, see Snapshot Management on SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose

SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Extended Warehouse Management (select a relevant release, for example) SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.3 Application Help . Go to SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) Warehouse Billing Snapshot Management .

NoteOnly snapshots for amount of yard tasks (represented by warehouse tasks) is supported.

SAP Yard LogisticsBilling C U S T O M E R 145

● Warehouse Billing Measurement Request ManagementThis enables you to use the SAP TM agreement data and determine the warehouse billing measurement services you must use.For more information, see Request for Warehouse Billing Measurement on SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Extended Warehouse Management(select a relevant release, for example) SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.3 Application Help . Go to

SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) Warehouse Billing Request for Warehouse Billing Measurement .

● Warehouse Billing Measurement ManagementThis enables you to generate warehouse billing measurement documents. The warehouse billing measurements contain the quantity of warehouse services used. You can then send this quantity information to the SAP TM system for charge calculation and settlement.For more information, see Warehouse Billing Measurement Management on SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Extended Warehouse Management(select a relevant release, for example) SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.3 Application Help . Go to

SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) Warehouse Billing Warehouse Billing Measurement Management .

146 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Billing

9 Settings

Use this component to make the following settings in the system:

● Assign Warehouse Numbers/Business Partners [page 147]● Activate Application Log

See SAP Library for SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM). Go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Extended Warehouse Management(select a relevant release, for example) SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.3 Application Help . Go to

Labor Management (LM) Labor Demand Planning Application Log .● Alerts [page 148]● Driver Communication [page 149]● Printing [page 151]● Data Archiving in Yard Logistics [page 153]● Questionnaire [page 155]● Maintain User for Self Check-In per Checkpoint [page 160]● Integration to SAP EWM [page 160]● Integration with SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling [page 163]● Integration with SAP Transportation Management [page 166]

9.1 Assign Warehouse Numbers/Business Partners

Use

Use this function to assign warehouse numbers to the master data supply chain unit. You should only make this assignment once for each warehouse number. Make sure that the owner of the warehouse and the default party entitled to dispose refer to business partners that already exist.

Activities

For each warehouse number, assign a supply chain unit, an owner, and a default party entitled to dispose. Note that you must make these assignments in the production system.

SAP Yard LogisticsSettings C U S T O M E R 147

9.2 Alerts

Here, you maintain the following alert settings:

● Check Arrival/Departure Alerts [page 148]● Execute Mass Processing of Time Based Alerts [page 148]● Maintain Alert Monitor Settings

See SAP Library for SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM). Go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Extended Warehouse Management(select a relevant release, for example) SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.3 Application Help . Go to

SCM Basis Alert Monitor .

9.2.1 Check Arrival/Departure Alerts

Use

You can use this report to check the arrival and departure dates and times of yard orders frequently during the day. This report triggers an alert automatically based on settings. Alerts can be displayed in the alert monitor.

For inbound yard orders, the report checks only those yard orders for which the check-in is not yet posted and for outbound yard orders, the report checks only those yard orders for which the check-out is not yet posted.

Features

This report allows the selection of a yard number and an order type (optional). You can also enter the yard order direction and the planned period.

In the case of inbound yard orders, the report checks the planned arrival date of the yard order and if the planned date and time is passed, the report triggers an alert. In the case of outbound yard orders, the report checks the planned departure date of the yard order and if the planned date and time is passed, the report triggers an alert.

9.2.2 Execute Mass Processing of Time Based Alerts

This report can be scheduled periodically to automatically create time based alerts. You use this report to analyze all the business objects in the yard, for example, yard requests, yard orders, yard task, transportation units. You can select the yard number and business object. The report calls the alert class that does the validations. If the validation of the alert class reports that the business object is valid for an alert, the report raises the corresponding alert.

This report runs periodically, depending on the frequency at which you have scheduled it in the system.

148 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Settings

9.3 Driver Communication

All drivers who approach the yard may not have system access and/or a suitable device. In this case, a simple and efficient method for a communication to external drivers is required. You use this function to define texts that can be sent to the driver of the vehicle as text messages on his/her mobile phone when a yard task is activated.

Prerequisites

You have executed the following functions:

● Define Texts for Driver Communication [page 149]● Maintain Text Symbols for Driver Communication [page 150]● Assign Text Messages to Activity Type [page 151]

Features

● The system sends the message when a yard task is activated automatically or manually using the yard task maintenance.

● The message is sent to the drive providing information about the next task for him/her. For example, "Drive to the a specific location".

● When a yard task is activated, the system displays the text in a popup. This happens only if you have set the Show Message Before Sending indicator from the Settings option of the Yard Order Overview screen. See Yard Order Overview [page 87]. From the popup, you can:○ Change the message text - You can edit the default text that you see in the popup.○ Confirm the sending of the message - The system sends the message to the mobile phone of the driver.○ Cancel the sending of the message - The system does not send the message but the yard task is activated.

● The language for the text is the driver language maintained in the yard order. If no language is maintained, the system uses the user language.

9.3.1 Define Texts for Driver Communication

You use this function to create or change texts that can be sent to the driver of the vehicle as text messages on his/her mobile phone when a yard task is activated.

You can maintain as many placeholders as you want to use in the message. These placeholders can be used to define the driver name, source storage location, destination storage location, and so on. To do so, from the user interface, go to Settings Driver Communication Maintain Text Symbol for Driver Communication .

SAP Yard LogisticsSettings C U S T O M E R 149

Prerequisite

In the yard order, you must maintain the telephone number of the driver.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Settings Driver Communication Define Texts for Driver Communication2. Enter the Text Name, Text ID and Language for the message. The text is maintained in this language.3. Select Display, Change or Create.4. Enter or change the text and save your entries.

NoteYou can enter placeholders here.

Related Information

Driver Communication [page 149]Maintain Text Symbols for Driver Communication [page 150]Assign Text Messages to Activity Type [page 151]

9.3.2 Maintain Text Symbols for Driver Communication

You use this function to store placeholders that are used in Text Name field.

These text fields are used when you define the texts for driver communication. To do so, from the user interface, go to Settings Driver Communication Define Texts for Driver Communication (transaction SO10) .

● Text Name - Defines the name of the placeholders● BO Name - Defines the business object (BO) of the required value of the placeholders● Node Name - Defines the node of the BO for the required value of the placeholders● Field Name - Defines the Field Name of the structure from the node

Example● Text Name = TEST_DRIVER● BO Name = /SAPYL/YARD_TASK● Node Name = ROOT● Placeholders Field Name = DRIVER_TYPE

Transaction SO10 Text = /SAPYL/DRIVER_GO_TO_DOOR

150 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Settings

Message: Driver &1TEST_DRIVER&1, please proceed

Placeholder is changed with the value of the DRIVER_TYPE from Node ROOT out of the BO /SAPYL/YARD_TASK.

9.3.3 Assign Text Messages to Activity Type

You use this function to maintain the Text Name for a Yard No. and Activity Type. The system reads the corresponding standard text.

To maintain the standard texts, from the user interface, go to Settings Driver Communication Define Texts for Driver Communication (transaction SO10) .

NoteIn the user interface for Driver Communication, the Text ID ST should be used for Standard Text. For example, see Text Name /SAPYL/DRIVER_GO_TO_DOOR.

9.4 Printing

You use this function to print the yard documents like yard requests, yard orders, and yard tasks.

You can print a yard document from the from the yard document screen. You can print the documents in the following ways:

● Using the Print button on the top of the screen. When you click the Print button, you get the following options:○ Print Immediately

1. When you select this option, the Printing Options popup appears.2. Select the Action Definition.

NoteYou are provided with the following predefined Actions. You can copy the existing PPF action to create one of your own and extend it.○ <Yard document type> document printing – The system automatically prints the document

in the background via status change of the yard object○ <Yard document type> document manual printing – You have to trigger manual printing of

the document

3. Select the Spool Control Data that you have maintained.The system sends the document to the spool for printing.

○ Print Preview1. When you select this option, the Printing Options popup appears.2. Select the Action Definition. You are provided with some predefined actions as mentioned above.

SAP Yard LogisticsSettings C U S T O M E R 151

The system generates a file that you can save on your local machine or open directly.● From the Output Management tab of the yard document.

○ The system automatically sends the document to the spool for printing as per your action definition.○ You can manually generate and print the document.○ You can reprint the documents from here.

Prerequisites

● To print the documents immediately using the Print button or from Output Management, you have to Define Spool Settings for Printing.

● To print the documents from Output Management, you have to maintain the conditions using:○ Maintain Conditions for Yard Request Printing○ Maintain Conditions for Yard Order Printing○ Maintain Conditions for Yard Task Printing

Related Information

Define Spool Settings for Printing [page 152]Maintain Conditions for Yard Document Printing [page 153]

9.4.1 Define Spool Settings for Printing

You use this function to maintain the spool settings or the output device for the printing of the yard documents.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Settings Printing Define Spool Settings for Printing .The Define Spool Settings for Printing screen appears.

2. Select New Entries.3. Select the yard number.4. Select the spool data.5. Enter other relevant information and save your entries.

Related Information

Printing [page 151]

152 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Settings

9.4.2 Maintain Conditions for Yard Document Printing

You use this function to maintain conditions for printing a yard document.

You can maintain the conditions for printing each type of yard document using the following links:

● Maintain Conditions for Yard Request Printing● Maintain Conditions for Yard Order Printing● Maintain Conditions for Yard Task Printing

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Settings Printing Maintain Conditions for <Yard document type> Printing.The Condition records - Process screen appears.

2. Select the Yard Number field as the condition records are sorted on the yard number.3. Click the Select records icon on the top of the screen.

The Select records dialog box appears.4. Enter or select the Yard Number for which you want to implement the condition technique.5. Select the Execute option.

The Condition Records – Process screen appears again.6. Select the condition type for which you want to maintain the action definition and spool data.7. Enter the Action Definition as either of the following:

○ /SAPYL/YO_PRINT_DOCUMENT - <Yard document type> document printing○ /SAPYL/YO_PRINT_DOCUMENT_MAN - <Yard document type> document printing manually

NoteThe above implementations for printing are examples. You can copy the existing PPF action to create one of your own and extend it.

8. Enter the required information for the action definition and the spool data, and save your entries.The system will print the yard documents as per the conditions that you have maintained.

9.5 Data Archiving in Yard Logistics

Data archiving is used to remove mass data from the database that is no longer required in the system but must be kept in a format that can be analyzed. The SAP data archiving concept is based on the Archive Development Kit (ADK). For more information, see the UI help on Data Archiving.

The following table shows the available archiving objects:

SAP Yard LogisticsSettings C U S T O M E R 153

Objects in Yard Logistics Archiving Objects

Yard Orders/Yard Requests /SAPYL/YO

Yard Tasks /SAPYL/YT

Yard Transportation Units /SAPYL/TU

For more information on each of the archiving objects, see the UI help.

Dependencies

The system can archive a yard task only if the corresponding yard order has already been archived

Activities

In the Application Job for Scheduling Archiving Jobs app, choose the archiving object in the Archiving Object field and choose a variant. For more information on how to schedule archiving jobs and how to create write variants, see the UI help.

Performing Application-Specific Customizing

Residence period should be set in Customizing under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Application Reusable Objects and Functions for BOPF Environment Archiving Adaptor Maintain BO-Specific Residence Periods .

Before archiving data, you must define the residence times and retention periods in SAP Information Lifecycle Management (ILM).

You choose whether data deletion is required for data stored in archive files or for data stored in the database, also depending on the type of deletion functionality available.

To delete personal data, you do the following:

● Run transaction IRMPOL and maintain the required residence and retention policies for the central business partner (ILM object: CA_BUPA).

● Run transaction IRMPOL and maintain the retention policies for the SAP ILM objects of the SAP Yard Logistics solution:○ SAPYL_YO Yard Orders○ SAPYL_YT Yard Tasks○ SAPYL_TU Transportation Units

● Run transaction BUPA_PRE_EOP to enable the EoP check function for the central business partner.● Business users can request unblocking of blocked data by using transaction BUP_REQ_UNBLK.● If you have the necessary authorizations, you can unblock data by running transaction BUPA_PRE_EOP.● You delete data by using transaction BUPA_PRE_EOP for the ILM objects of SAP Yard Logistics.

154 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Settings

For information about how to configure blocking and deletion in SAP Yard Logistics, go to https://help.sap.com/yl and see section Configuration: Simplified Blocking and Deletion of the Security Information document for the solution

9.6 Questionnaire

You use this function to maintain the settings for the yard order/yard task questionnaire.

The system generates this questionnaire when you create a yard order/yard task. You must answer the questions before you check-in/check-out the yard order or confirm the yard task, respectively. You can answer these questions from the yard order/yard task desktop application or from the Fiori UI.

The answers to the questions are stored in the system. The functionality is used to control whether all prerequisites for specific processes or yard internal checks are met. For example, checks for check-in of a yard order, validation of inspection for damages.

Prerequisites

Define the possible check groups in Customizing for Define Check Group under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics General Settings Questionnaire . Depending on the check group, the system generates and/or changes specific questions when you create a yard order/yard task and/or modify the content of the items.

SAP Yard LogisticsSettings C U S T O M E R 155

Activities

1. Maintain Conditions for Questionnaire [page 156]2. Define Texts for Questionnaire [page 157]3. Maintain Text Symbols for Questionnaire [page 158]4. Assign Checks to Check Groups for Yard Orders [page 158]5. Assign Checks to Check Groups for Yard Tasks [page 159]

Related Information

Sections of a Yard Order [page 85]Self Check-In [page 131]Create a Yard Task [page 121]Yard Task Execution [page 132]

9.6.1 Maintain Conditions for Questionnaire

You use this function to specify the check group that the system should select for each possible combination of selection fields.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Settings Questionnaire Maintain Conditions .The General Condition Maintenance screen appears.

2. Enter the Application,

ExampleQYL - Condition Technique for Yard Logistics Questionnaire

3. Enter the MaintenanceGrp,

ExampleQYL_YO – YO Questionnaire or QYL_YO – YT Questionnaire

NoteBy default, the Maintenance Context is GCM.

4. Select the Execute option.The Condition records - Process screen appears.

156 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Settings

5. Select the Yard Number field as the condition records are sorted on the yard number.6. Click the Select records icon on the top of the screen.

The Select records dialog box appears.7. Enter or select the Yard Number for which you want to implement the condition technique.8. Select the Execute option.

The Condition Records – Process screen appears again.9. Select the condition type for which you want to maintain the check group.10. Enter the required information for the check group, and save your entries.

The system generates the questionnaire as per the conditions that you have maintained.

9.6.2 Define Texts for Questionnaire

You use this function to maintain the questions as standard texts.

You can create the standard texts in the desired language. You have to maintain a standard text for each question.

You can maintain as many placeholders as you want to use in the question. To do so, from the user interface, go to Settings Questionnaire Maintain Text Symbol for Questionnaire .

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Settings Questionnaire Define Texts for Questionnaire .The Standard Text: Request screen appears.

2. Enter the Text Name, Text ID and Language for the question.3. Select Display, Change or Create.4. Enter or change the text and save your entries.

NoteYou can enter a variable that you have maintained as placeholders in the text.

Related Information

Questionnaire [page 155]Assign Checks to Check Groups for Yard Orders [page 158]Assign Checks to Check Groups for Yard Tasks [page 159]

SAP Yard LogisticsSettings C U S T O M E R 157

9.6.3 Maintain Text Symbols for Questionnaire

You use this function to store placeholders that are used in Text Name field.

These text fields are used when you define the texts for the questionnaire. To do so, from the user interface, go to Settings Questionnaire Define Texts for Questionnaire (transaction SO10) .

● Text Name - Defines the name of the placeholders● BO Name - Defines the business object (BO) of the required value of the placeholders● Node Name - Defines the node of the BO for the required value of the placeholders● Field Name - Defines the Field Name of the structure from the node

Example● Text Name = WEIGHT● BO Name = /SAPYL/YARD_ORDER● Node Name = ITEM● Placeholders Field Name = GROSS_WEIGHT

Transaction SO10 Text = /SAPYL/CONFIRM_WEIGHT

Message: Confirm the gross weight: &WEIGHT&

Placeholder is changed with the value of the GROSS_WEIGHT from Node ITEM out of the BO /SAPYL/YARD_ORDER.

9.6.4 Assign Checks to Check Groups for Yard Orders

You use this function to assign the texts (questions) to the check groups. Depending on the check group, the system generates and/or changes specific questions when you create a yard order and/or modify the content of the items.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Settings Questionnaire Assign Checks to Check Groups for Yard Orders .2. Select New Entries.3. Enter the Yard No. for which the questionnaire is relevant.4. Enter the Check Grp that you have defined.5. Enter the sequence in which the questions should appear.6. Select the Text Name, that is, the question that you have defined.7. Select the allowed result or the answer that is allowed for the question, that is, a Yes or a No.8. Select the Follow-On option. If the user answers a question in a way that is different from the allowed answer,

the system considers the Follow-On option. You have the following options:○ No Action - Nothing happens and the system does not display any message on the user interface. The

process can be executed as planned.

158 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Settings

○ Deny Action - The check-in/check-out is aborted and the system displays a specific message on the user interface.

○ BAdI - The system reads the BAdI if an implementation of the BAdI exists. You can customize the BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Maintain Questionnaire Checks under SAP Customizing Implementation GuideYard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics . In the BAdI, you can specify your own logic.

9. Save your entries.

Related Information

Questionnaire [page 155]Define Texts for Questionnaire [page 157]

9.6.5 Assign Checks to Check Groups for Yard Tasks

You use this function to assign the texts (questions) to the check groups. Depending on the check group, the system generates and/or changes specific questions when you create a yard task and/or modify the content of the items.

Activities

1. From the user interface, go to Settings Questionnaire Assign Checks to Check Groups for Yard Tasks2. Select New Entries.3. Enter the Yard No. for which the questionnaire is relevant.4. Enter the Check Grp that you have defined.5. Enter the sequence in which the questions should appear.6. Select the Text Name, that is, the question that you have defined.7. Select the allowed result or the answer that is allowed for the question, that is, a Yes or a No.8. Select the Follow-On option. If the user answers a question in a way that is different from the allowed answer,

the system considers the Follow-On option. You have the following options:○ No Action - Nothing happens and the system does not display any message on the user interface. The

process can be executed as planned.○ Deny Action - The yard task confirmation is aborted and the system displays a specific message on the

user interface.○ BAdI - The system reads the BAdI if an implementation of the BAdI exists. You can customize the BAdI in

Customizing for BAdI: Maintain Questionnaire Checks under SAP Customizing Implementation GuideYard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard Logistics . In the BAdI, you can specify your own logic.

9. Save your entries.

SAP Yard LogisticsSettings C U S T O M E R 159

Related Information

Questionnaire [page 155]Define Texts for Questionnaire [page 157]

9.7 Maintain User for Self Check-In per Checkpoint

You use this function to maintain the user for each checkpoint of a yard. You can maintain a single user for all the drivers. This user is used to log into the self check-in transaction and to execute the self check-in.

From the user interface, go to Settings Self Check-In Maintain User for Self Check-In per Checkpoint .

Related Information

Self Check-In [page 131]

9.8 Integration to SAP EWM

Use

Communication from Yard Logistics to SAP EWM uses defined interfaces, and enables distribution, changes to, and confirmation of transportation-relevant data. In Yard Logistics and EWM, the interfaces are based on transportation units. Where necessary, SAP Yard Logistics triggers subsequent communication steps for specific processes. Communication is asynchronous and uses webservices.

Integration

The following figure gives you an overview of the functions supported by the interfaces between Yard Logistics and SAP EWM. The figure represents a scenario where only one warehouse visit is maintained.

160 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Settings

Yard Logistics – Integration Scenario Outbound Process

● Check-In processes○ Execution of check-in in Yard Logistics○ Subsequent trigger of check-in in SAP EWM

● Door determination○ Door determination done in SAP EWM○ Yard Logistics requests door from SAP EWM when a depending movement to a door is created

● Confirmation of Door Arrival sent from Yard Logistics for SAP EWM● Loading Confirmation sent from SAP EWM to Yard Logistics● Door departure reported from Yard Logistics to SAP EWM● Check-out posting in Yard Logistics triggers subsequent posting in SAP EWM

Prerequisites

● You have setup the processes in SAP EWM, Yard Management is switched off in SAP EWM.

● You have maintained the following activities in Customizing under SAP Customizing Implementation GuideYard Logistics Integration Integration to SAP Extended Warehouse Management :○ Assign EWM Business Systems and Warehouses to Yard○ Maintain EWM Checkpoints

● You have maintained the EWM warehouses for the EWM business systems linked to the yard that the different items of the yard request/yard order are required to visit in the Warehouse Visits tab for the yard request/yard order item. See Sections of a Yard Order [page 85].

● You have made the following settings. To do so, from the user interface, go to Settings Integration to SAP EWM .○ Assign Docking Location to Warehouse [page 162]○ Assign External Warehouse ID to Storage Type [page 162]○ Determine EWM Door [page 162]○ Maintain Logical Ports for EWM Integration [page 163]

SAP Yard LogisticsSettings C U S T O M E R 161

Features

The following functions are available for Yard Logistics and SAP EWM for processing inbound and outbound yard processes.

● Processing of Inbound Yard Processes○ Check-in posting in SAP EWM triggered from Yard Logistics○ Request of door from Yard Logistics to SAP EWM○ Confirmation of arrival at door from Yard Logistics to SAP EWM○ Receiving of unloading end information from SAP EWM to Yard Logistics○ Confirmation of departure from door in Yard Logistics to SAP EWM○ Check-out posting in SAP EWM triggered from Yard Logistics

● Processing of Outbound Yard Processes○ Check-in posting in SAP EWM triggered from Yard Logistics○ Request of door from Yard Logistics to SAP EWM○ Confirmation of arrival at door from Yard Logistics to SAP EWM○ Receiving of loading end information from SAP EWM to Yard Logistics○ Confirmation of departure from door in Yard Logistics to SAP EWM○ Check-out posting in SAP EWM triggered from Yard Logistics

9.8.1 Assign Docking Location to Warehouse

You use this function to define linkage between the docking location and the external EWM warehouse and business system. It is used during automatic creation of warehouse visits for yard order items if the dock appointment is created for the corresponding item.

To execute this function, from the user interface, go to Settings Integration to SAP EWM Assign Docking Location to Warehouse .

9.8.2 Assign External Warehouse ID to Storage Type

You use this function to assign the external warehouse ID, which represents the external EWM system and the EWM warehouse, to the SAP Yard Logistics storage type. This function is required to send arrival departure notification to SAP EWM in case of check-in and check-out of yard order or the movement confirmation into this storage type.

To execute this function, from the user interface, go to Settings Integration to SAP EWM Assign External Warehouse ID to Storage Type .

9.8.3 Determine EWM Door

You use this function to define the roles for bins that are engaged into an integration process with SAP Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) system. This information is used for sending out notifications to SAP EWM. The

162 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Settings

system sends the integration notifications during confirmation of yard tasks, which have the configured bin as the destination.

A storage bin can have one of following possible roles:

● Checkpoint – TU at yard arrival/departure notification is sent to EWM● Door – TU at door arrival/departure notification is sent to EWM

If the activity type for a yard task is set to Relevant for Subsystem, the destination bin determination is done in EWM and this setting is evaluated to map the door, determined in EWM to a bin maintained in the yard.

Besides the storage bin role, you must define the mapping of SAP Yard Logistics storage bin to EWM storage.

9.8.4 Maintain Logical Ports for EWM Integration

You use this function to maintain the logical ports. The logical port should be specified per external EWM system for each of the used proxy classes. This function is used during integration with the external EWM system, which is accessed by means of web services. There are many logical ports for each proxy class but only one is used for EWM integration.

To execute this function, from the user interface, go to Settings Integration to SAP EWM Maintain Logical Ports for EWM Integration .

9.9 Integration with SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling

You use this function to execute the following:

● Assign Docking Location and Loading Point to Yard Number [page 163]● Maintain Door Assignment to Docking Location and Loading Point [page 166]

9.9.1 Assign Docking Location and Loading Point to Yard Number

You use this function to assign the docking location and the loading point to the yard.

You assign a docking location to a yard. A docking location can have multiple loading points.

Activities

● From the user interface, go to Settings SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling Integration Assign DL and LP to Yard Number .

SAP Yard LogisticsSettings C U S T O M E R 163

● Select New Entries.● Select the Yard No.● Select the Docking Location of the yard. You can have multiple entries to assign more than one docking

location to a yard.● Select the Loading Point for the Docking Location. You can have multiple entries to assign more than one

loading point to a docking location.● Save your entries.

Related Information

Dock Appointment Scheduling [page 168]

9.9.1.1 Integration with SAP ERP Shipment

Communication from SAP ERP to SAP Yard Logistics uses a defined, IDoc-based interface. This interface enables the distribution, creation, and confirmation of shipment data. The interface is based on the shipment document in SAP ERP and on the rard request in SAP Yard Logistics.

After finalizing the planning of the shipment, the output management in SAP ERP triggers the creation and sending of an IDoc to SAP Yard Logistics. In SAP Yard Logistics the respective in- or outbound yard request is created. Once the execution in the yard is completed, shipment confirmation is sent via IDoc back to SAP ERP. The trigger for this message is the completion of the inbound yard order or the check-out posting of the outbound yard order.

Integration

The following figure gives you an overview of the functions supported by the interface between SAP ERP and SAP Yard Logistics The figure represents a scenario for an outbound shipment; inbound shipment scenario is also supported.

164 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Settings

● Finalize planning of shipment in SAP ERP○ Trigger IDoc to SAP Yard Logistics○ Create outbound yard request in SAP Yard Logistics

● Check-out posting in SAP Yard Logistics triggers posting in SAP ERP○ Send confirmation IDoc to SAP ERP shipment○ Update shipment in ERP

Features

The following functions are available for an SAP ERP shipment in SAP Yard Logistics for processing inbound and outbound yard processes:

● Processing of Inbound Yard Processes○ Planning completion of inbound shipment in SAP ERP triggers transfer of shipment information including

delivery data to SAP Yard Logistics. When the shipment information arrives in YL, it triggers the creation of an inbound yard request, which is later converted into an inbound yard order.

○ Check-in posting and further actions trigger update of the timestamps in the inbound yard order.○ Completion of inbound yard order triggers update of the ERP shipment by transferring relevant

information to SAP ERP.● Processing of Outbound Yard Processes

○ Planning completion of outbound shipment in SAP ERP triggers transfer of shipment information including delivery data to SAP Yard Logistics. When the shipment information arrives in YL, it triggers the creation of an outbound yard request, which is later converted into an outbound yard order.

○ Activation posting and further actions trigger update of the timestamps in the outbound yard order.○ Check-out of outbound yard order triggers the update of the ERP shipment, transferring the respective

information.

Prerequisites

● Customizing of the SAP Shipment flow to SAP EWM: For details, visit http://help.sap.com/EWM93 and navigate to the application help topic under SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) Shipping and Receiving Integration of Shipping and Receiving with Other Applications Integration of ERP Shipments in Shipping and Receiving. This setup is completely re-used to integrate with SAP Yard Logistics which uses the same shipment IDoc to create a yard request document. The only difference is to determine the relevant yard number based on a business function maintained in transport document.To shorten the setup, you can use the How-to guide titled Configuring LE-TRA integration from https://help.sap.com/EWM93 Additional Information How-To-Guides .

● Follow the instructions given in section Integration to ERP Shipment of the configuration guide.

SAP Yard LogisticsSettings C U S T O M E R 165

9.9.2 Maintain Door Assignment to Docking Location and Loading Point

You use this function to assign the docking location and location point to a storage type. The system assigns a door to a storage bin.

Activities

● From the user interface, go to Settings SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling Integration Maintain Door assignment to DL and LP .

● Select New Entries.● Select the Yard No.● Select the Storage Type.● Select the Docking Location of the yard. You can have multiple entries to assign more than one docking

location to a storage type.● Select the Loading Point for the Docking Location. You can have multiple entries to assign more than one

loading point to a docking location.● Save your entries.

9.10 Integration with SAP Transportation Management

Use

Yard planning and execution offers features to integrate Yard Logistics with Transportation Management (SAP TM). With this integration, you can plan and monitor the entire transportation process from the planning stage through the yard processing up to the transportation execution.

Prerequisites

You have made the following Customizing settings for integration with SAP TM in the Customizing for Yard Logistics under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Integration Integration to SAP Transportation Management :

● Map TM Freight Order Types● Map TM Relevant TU Types for Yard Request● Map TM Business Partner Roles● Map Business Transaction Document Type Code● Map TM Timestamp to Yard Request Time Point

166 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Settings

● Map External Reference Documents to YR Header Reference Documents● Map External Reference Documents to YR Item Reference Documents

You have made the setting for Assign Transportation Unit Type to Packaging Material. To do so, from the user interface, go to Settings Integration to SAP Transportation Management› . Here, you map the TU type with the packaging material. You can define a mapping for a specific TU type, or in combination with the Equipment/Vehicle Type from Transportation Management.

Features

SAP Yard Logistics and SAP TM integration offers you the following features:

● Receiving of inbound and outbound yard requests from SAP TM based on freight orders, including:○ Planned transportation units, for example, truck and trailer. The transportation unit (TU) number is

determined based on the registration number or container number entered in SAP TM.○ Planned content of the transportation units○ Planned arrival and departure date and time○ Reference documents like freight order○ Involved business partners

● Planning of yard processes based on these Yard Requests● Receiving of updates from SAP TM prior to start of the yard processing● Confirmation to SAP TM after finalizing the yard processing

SAP Yard LogisticsSettings C U S T O M E R 167

10 Dock Appointment Scheduling

You use this function to integrate SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling with SAP Yard Logistics.

Prerequisites

● You have made the Customizing settings for SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SCM Extended Warehouse Management Extended Warehouse Management Dock Appointment Scheduling . Here, you have defined the document category and the item type for each document category. Yard Logistics supports multiple appointments for one item.

● You have made the Customizing settings for integration with SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling in Customizing for Yard Logistics under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Integration

Integration to Dock Appointment Scheduling .● You have made the settings for integration with SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling on the user interface for

Yard Logistics under Settings SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling Integration . For more information, see Integration with SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling [page 163].

Features

● In order that the Dock Appointment Scheduling integration works with Yard Logistics, both the solutions have to be loaded onto the same system.

● Leading document for the Dock Appointment Scheduling appointment - A leading document is one from where you have created the appointment. For example, you have created the appointment from a yard request and have released the yard request. The same appointment is present in the corresponding yard order. Here, the yard request is the leading document for that appointment. You can create more appointments from the yard order for which the yard order is the leading document.

● You can delete an appointment only by deleting the leading document for the appointment. If you cancel a yard order, the system deletes only those appointments for which the yard order is the leading document. You have to cancel the yard request to delete the appointments created there. You, however, can delete an appointment manually without cancelling the leading document.

● When you create a yard request or a yard order, which are Dock Appointment Scheduling relevant and has a TU type assigned that is also Dock Appointment Scheduling relevant, the system automatically assigns the docking location and loading point if a unique docking location and loading point combination is assigned to the yard request or a yard order and TU type in the settings. See Integration with SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling [page 163].

● When you save the yard request/yard order, the system calls the Business Add-In /SAPYL/BADI_ITEM_DAS_DET, which creates an appointment. You can see this appointment under the Dock Appointment Scheduling section for an item in a yard request or a yard order. You can click the document number of the appointment to open the appointment document. Here, you can plan the time slots for the appointment.

168 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Dock Appointment Scheduling

NoteYou can maintain this BAdI in Customizing for BAdI: Determine Loading Appointment Item Changes under

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Yard Logistics Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Yard LogisticsIntegration Integration to Dock Appointment Scheduling

● If an item has only one yard task assigned to it, the system automatically assigns the appointment for the item to the yard task. If, however, there are multiple appointments for an item, you have to manually select the appointment for the yard task.

● You cannot check-in a yard order for which the appointment status is Provisional. You have to plan the time slot for the appointment, which changes the status of the appointment to Planned. Now, you can check-in the yard order.

● Statuses of an Appointment:○ Provisional - When the system creates an appointment.○ Planned - When you plan the time slot for the appointment.○ Arrived at Checkpoint - When you check-in the yard order.○ Arrived at Dock - Once you confirm the yard task that moves the TU to the dock (warehouse door).○ Departed from Dock - Once you confirm the yard task that moves the TU from the dock (warehouse

door).○ Departed from Checkpoint - Once you Complete the yard order.

See Also

Dock Appointment Scheduling

See SAP Library for SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM). Go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose SAP Supply Chain Management SAP Extended Warehouse Management . Select a relevant release, for example, SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.4. Choose Application Help. Navigate to

SAP Extended Warehouse Management SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling . See SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling.

SAP Yard LogisticsDock Appointment Scheduling C U S T O M E R 169

11 Data Protection and Privacy

11.1 Migration Report for SAP Yard Logistics Drivers to Business Partners

SAP Yard Logistics does not allow the direct storing of drivers' personal data in the yard documents such as Yard Order, Yard Request, or Yard Task, however, the solution offers the feature to create a business partner to transfer the driver's personal data to it. The driver's business partner will be created automatically for new business documents. For yard documents created before the introduction of this feature, a migration report is provided to update existing documents to create a driver's business partner as well.

The report (that you can start by using transaction code /SAPYL/YO_DRIV_BP) creates a business partner for a driver based on the driver information in one of the newest yard documents available in the solution. The language, country, and contact number of a driver shall now be stored in the business partner. The ID of the created business partner is stored in the Driver Type field in the yard documents in which the driver appears.

This report program allows you to select the yard documents for which you want to do the driver-to-business-partner conversion. You have the option also restrict your selection by yard number

11.2 Report to Update Start of Retention Time for Yard Documents

In the SAP Yard Logistics solution, the system must perform an End of Purpose (EoP) check. An EoP check determines whether the business partner is still relevant for business activities based on the retention period defined for it. If you have activated the business function BUPA_ILM_BF, the system automatically updates the SoRT information for all documents referring to business partners when a document is completed. However, you must note that enabling this business function does not automatically update the SoRT information in previously-completed documents that exist in your database.

You use this report (that you can start using transaction code /SAPYL/DPP_SORT) after you have maintained all Information Lifecycle Management (ILM) policies for the ILM objects in the solution and have assigned the documents to an ILM rule group via the ILM Live policy. On running the report, the Start of Retention Time (SoRT) information is automatically calculated based on the defined ILM rules for all documents that refer to business partners in the solution.

170 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Data Protection and Privacy

12 Operations Information

Certain administrative activities are required for the proper functioning of the SAP Yard Logistics solution. This component provides the operations information, which covers the following topics:

● Installation and Setup [page 173]● Technical Configuration [page 179]● Monitoring Concept [page 181]● Administration and Management [page 187]

SAP Yard logistics is based on SAP Extended Warehouse Management 9.3 and SAP NetWeaver 7.40.Therefore, the general operations information that is covered in the related operations guides also applies to SAP Yard logistics.

For more information about related guides, see the following resources on SAP Help Portal:

Resource Location

Operations Guide for SAP EWM 9.3 Visit the product information page for SAP EWM on the SAP Help Portal at https://help.sap.com/ewmand select the appro­priate product version from the version dropdown.

Technical System Landscape

SAP NetWeaver platform is used at several software layers within SAP Yard Logistics. The database layer (accessed from the BOPF modelled business objects) uses the database connectivity of the ABAP application server, that is, the database can be either SAP HANA database or a classical relational database.

On top of the database layer, SAP Yard Logistics uses SAP EWM9.3 (with SP03 as minimum requirement) as technical basis (without the need to implement warehousing specific processes) as well as software components from SCM Basis (in more detail: SAP Alert Management, SAP condition technique, PPF printing). To reuse existing EWM functionalities, SAP Yard Logistics uses a simplified setup of a (technical) warehouse number and its related layout (later to be used as a yard layout) and master data (especially, master data for EWM shipping and receiving). This need not to be confused with the linked warehousing processes that runs on independent EWM business systems used for the EWM-related processes. These are "real" EWM warehousing systems that will be triggered from the yard processes at dock to EWM warehousing door or departure from door. For details, see the multiple warehouse scenario in SAP Yard Logistics described in a later chapter.

A special case is the SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling (SAP DAS for short). This application can be used independently (of EWM) but is a software component as part of SAP EWM. In the SAP Yard Logistics processes, an integration to SAP DAS is offered as well (see details in a later chapter). However, to allow the business user a seamless user interface between SAP Yard Logistics and SAP DAS, we only offer the SAP DAS application to run on the SAP Yard Logistics system.

The business documents for SAP Yard Logistics are modelled in the BOPF Business Object layer. A business object is a semantic entity that represents the smallest data unit in a business scenario within SAP Yard Logistics. You use a BOPF business object to define data structures and business logic. To define the data structure part of such a business object, you create nodes, elements, and associations between nodes. To define the business logic, you

SAP Yard LogisticsOperations Information C U S T O M E R 171

create entities such as actions, determinations, or validations. The business documents created for SAP Yard Logistics are listed in the table below.

For the modeling of yard processes, SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM release 9.3 SP03) has largely been re-used as a technical foundation (as already mentioned above). This comprises of the following:

● Master data, for example, warehouse numbers, storage layout mapping● Business entities, for example, business partners, resources● Interfaces to other SAP components like SAP TM and SAP EWM warehouse billing● Business documents like EWM TUs and its functionality, as part of shipping and receiving● Warehouse tasks for documentation of yard movements and yard activities

BOPF Business Objects defined in SAP Yard Logistics

Business Object Technical name Description

Yard Request /SAPYL/YARD_ORDER A yard request is a planning document for the yard coordinator to control the workload for a specific yard that is repre­sented as a yard number. It can be en­tered manually into the SAP Yard Logis­tics application or can be sent via a web service (LDAP request) from an external system.

The yard request can be released for daily operations as a yard order.

Technically, the BOPF business objects, yard request and yard order, use the same business object model but are dis­tinguished by the key field DOC_CAT

Yard Order /SAPYL/YARD_ORDER A yard order represents the workload to be executed within a certain period based on the planning from the yard re­quests. The document structure of a yard order is the same as that of a yard re­quest with the following exceptions – it uses a different key field, DOC_CAT and supports status management.

Yard Task /SAPYL/YARD_TASK A yard task describes the activity that should be performed on the item(s) be­longing to a yard order (container, trailer) within the yard. The activity can consti­tute either a movement from a source storage bin to a destination storage bin, or a non-movement activity, for example, cleaning of containers.

172 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Operations Information

Business Object Technical name Description

Yard Transportation Unit /SAPYL/YARD_TU A yard transportation unit is a business object for wrapping SAP EWM Transpor­tation Units and enhancing them by SAP Yard Logistics­specific functionality like TU grouping, storing of seals and meas­urements.

Based on the modelled business objects, the user interface layer is also NetWeaver-based. For the expert business user, all user interfaces are defined using Floorplan Manager (FPM), based on Web-Dynpro for ABAP for the single document applications and Personal Object Worklist (POWL for short) for lists of document applications. To allow a graphical representation of the operations within a specific yard, a yard cockpit has been defined (also based on ABAP FPM as ActiveX control. This needs a local installation of SAP Visual Business 2.1 on the business user's PC), and SAP Visual Business shows the schematic model of the yard and its parts based on 3D geographical data.

For one specific role, that is, yard operations, a mobile user interface is provided. This mobile app is developed using SAP UI5. The UIs of the mobile app are called using the SAP Fiori Launchpad from the web browser of your choice. It allows for a unique mobile experience via browser, as well as through hardware independent apps, which can be consumed through the SAP Fiori client.

NoteYou can find more information about the underlying NetWeaver platform technology in the SAP NetWeaver Administrator's Guide – Technical Operations Manual in the SAP Library on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/nw_platform .

The SAP Yard Logistics application is built on top of SAP EWM, which is based on SAP NetWeaver technology. Therefore, the monitoring tools from SAP NetWeaver, such as the Computing Center Management System (CCMS), are reused.

We recommend that you set up the Monitoring Infrastructure as described in the section on Monitoring Concept.

You find this documentation on the SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver 7.4. Go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose Technology Platform SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver 7.4 Application Help . Go to Function-Oriented View Solution Lifecycle Management Solution Monitoring .

12.1 Installation and Setup

As SAP Yard Logistics has SAP EWM release 9.3 as a technical foundation, its installation is based on SAP EWM. For more information, you can refer to the installation guide for SAP EWM by visiting the product information page for SAP EWM on the SAP Help Portal at https://help.sap.com/ewmand selecting the specific product version from the version dropdown.

SAP Yard LogisticsOperations Information C U S T O M E R 173

NoteImportant information about installing or upgrading to SAP EWM 9.3 is provided in SAP Note 2126732 . This note is updated on a regular basis. Therefore, make sure you have the current version of this note before you start the installation.

SAP Visual Business

In SAP Yard Logistics, the yard cockpit graphical visualization is based on SAP Visual Business, which is a technical component for geo-visualization.

SAP Visual Business is a user interface technology that visualizes data from SAP and external data sources on a single screen. SAP Visual Business applications not only combine different types of content, but also include interactive graphics that visualize and combine enterprise data with geographical or three-dimensional real-world scenes.

The SAP Visual Business front-end component used on the SAP Yard Logistics' FPM user interface is a client component. The client-side installation is integrated into the SAP front-end installer, also known as SAPSetup, which is available on SAP Service Marketplace.

For use on NetWeaver platform release 7.4, SAP Visual Business release 2.1 is recommended.

The corresponding local user interface linked to this release is NetWeaver Business Client 5.0 PL12 (or higher) or NetWeaver Business Client 6.0 PL05.

For more information, see:

● Application Help of SAP Visual Business 2.1 at http://help.sap.com/visualbusiness21● Administration and Configuration topics at http://scn.sap.com/docs/DOC-54524

SAP Fiori Launchpad

The SAP Fiori launchpad is the entry point for Fiori apps via desktops and on mobile devices. To access these apps, you must configure the SAP Fiori launchpad so that your users can access the apps that have been assigned to their respective roles.

For detailed information about the configuration tasks for the SAP Fiori launchpad, see the following documentation – For SAP NetWeaver 7.4, go to SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/nw74 and choose Application Help. Go to UI Technologies in SAP NetWeaver SAP Fiori Launchpad Setting Up the Launchpad . The SAP Fiori Search is not supported in SAP Yard Logistics 2.0.

174 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Operations Information

Printing from Overview Lists

If you want to use the print functionality from the overview lists of yard orders, yard requests and yard tasks (button Print Version), you must install and set up the printing services, for example, ADS, as described in SAP Note 1413938 (WD ABAP ALV - creating print version).

Mail Server for Driver Communication (SAPconnect)

SAPconnect offers a uniform interface for external communication that supports sending using telecommunication services such as fax, text messaging (pager/SMS), and e-mails. In SAP Yard Logistics, it is used to send a short message service (SMS) for driver advice after the check-in of a Yard Order document.

NoteYou find this documentation on the SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver 7.4. Go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose Technology Platform SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver 7.4 Application Help . Go to Function-Oriented View Application Server Application Server ABAP Other Services . Select

Services for Business Users SAPconnect .

● Transaction SCOT for setup of SAPconnect● Transaction SOST for monitoring of SMS sent● SAP Note 455140 for Configuration of e-mail, fax, paging/SMS via SMTP● SAP Note 552616 for FAQ on SAPoffice - Sending to external recipients

Adobe Document Services for Printing of Yard Documents

To be able to print the yard-related PDF forms for yard orders, yard tasks, and yard TU's, the Adobe® Document Services (ADS) has to be activated in the SAP Yard Logistics system. These ADS services provide a range of form and document creation and manipulation functions. Adobe® Document Services enhance the document handling capabilities of SAP Web Application Server (SAP Web AS). Adobe® Document Services allow SAP applications (either Java or ABAP) to take advantage of the full range of capabilities in Adobe Acrobat® Professional, Adobe® Acrobat Standard, and Adobe Reader®. These capabilities enable you to:

● Create and deploy interactive forms that look exactly like their paper counterparts● Generate dynamic PDF documents from data contained in the SAP system● Embed other file formats inside PDF documents as attachments

NoteFor the configuration of the ADS Services, please consult SAP Note 894009 - Adobe® Document Services: Configuration.

SAP Yard LogisticsOperations Information C U S T O M E R 175

SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling

SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling can be deployed as an integrated solution with a local SAP Yard Logistics system. As a prerequisite, the specific roles for SAP DAS has to be added to the roles of the SAP Yard Logistics to be able to perform a simple setup of SAP DAS. Go to https://help.sap.com/EWM93. Select the Application Help. Choose SAP Extended Warehouse Management SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling . On that page, follow the link for Roles of Dock Appointment Scheduling. In the context of SAP Yard Logistics, we use the SAP DAS as a standalone application as we start the creation of appointments based on Yard Request and Yard Order items (each yard document item allows multiple appointments for different docking locations and loading points). Therefore, the setup for SAP DAS with SAP EWM using the transportation unit as a reference object is not necessary for SAP Yard Logistics setup. Once the simple setup of the standalone SAP DAS has been executed, (you can find that under Settings Simple Setup for the DAS Administrator's menu), you can assign for a specific yard several docking locations and loading points. Based on this assignment, the arrival and departure at checkpoint events in the DAS appointment are updated.

In addition to that, SAP Yard Logistics allows assigning a yard specific "door" storage type to a docking location and loading point. Once a yard task is targeting to such a storage type or targeting from such a storage type, the arrival and departure at dock events in the DAS appointment are updated based on the appointment that is assigned to this yard task.

Note

Go to https://help.sap.com/EWM93. Select the Application Help. Choose SAP Extended Warehouse Management SAP Dock Appointment Scheduling .

SAP Information Lifecycle Management

You use the Retention Management functions of SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management (ILM) to manage the lifecycle of the data of a live application system from its creation (database) to its destruction (database or ILM store). Since transferred data remains accessible and the periods required by law can be adhered to, you can regularly store data that is no longer required for operations in the ILM store and optimize the data volume in your system.

ILM Retention Management offers the following functions:

● Putting legal holds on data that is relevant for legal cases so it cannot be deleted or destroyed. Legal holds affect the data in the database as well as the data in the ILM store.

● Grouping data objects that are to be stored or queried together in audit areas.● ILM rules for time-based management of data objects, for the following purposes:

○ Restriction of the retention period for reasons of data protection○ Adherence to legal requirements for retention periods for tax auditing and product liability purposes.

● Deleting data for which the retention period has expired and for which there is no legal hold.

To activate SAP ILM, you need to set the central switch ILM in Customizing for business functions.

NoteSee Using ILM Retention Management in the Application System at http://help.sap.com/saphelp_nw70ehp1/helpdata/en/09/ec83476f0942bcaea4481bc02ddf23/content.htm?frameset=/en/09/

176 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Operations Information

ec83476f0942bcaea4481bc02ddf23/frameset.htm&current_toc=/en/35/aaef16745644c397ec0024b31fb191/plain.htm&node_id=36&show_children=true

Loading Scheme Adaptation

Before SP01, a loading schema consisted of a sequence structure subdivided into sequence numbers. The sequence numbers themselves were not dependent on the loading scheme but only on the sequence structure. In SP01, the Sequence Structure is renamed to Layout, and the Sequence Numbers are renamed to Positions (within a layout). Now, the positions are dependent on the loading scheme as well as on the layout.

This means, if you have Customized a sequence structure with sequence numbers, you have to do it again respecting the layout and its positions (which are now dependent on the loading schema).

Technically, the database table /SAPYL/TU_LS_SEQ (for the loading scheme positions) now has a key field (Loading Scheme ID) and therefore, requires manual maintenance. As this Customizing table is delivered without any entries, the change should not have an impact.

Customizing Activity “Define Container Number Owner Codes”

In SP01, the Customizing activity Define Business Identifier Codes (BIC) is replaced by activity Define Container Number Owner Codes. Before SP01, the Business Identifier Code had to be setup by a 4-digit character code used as a standard setting based on ISO 6346. In the changed activity, the 4-digits are separated into 3-digits for the owner code and a 1-digit code for the equipment category.

Technically, the database table /SAPYL/TU_BIC is no longer used but is replaced by database table /SAPYL/CNT_BIC containing the owner code and the equipment category. As this Customizing table is delivered without any entries, the change should not have an impact but you have to maintain the entries in the changed table manually.

12.2 Migration for Release 2

Changes to BOPF Model of Yard Orders/Yard Requests Correction Report

In SAP Yard Logistics 1.0, two activity categories were used for the yard order business object - Yard Order and Yard Request. In SAP Yard Logistics 2.0, only one standard activity category is used - ROOT.

You use the report /SAPYL/YO_NODE_CAT_MIGRATION to set the activity category for all yard orders for a specific yard (specified as select-option) in the database table /SAPYL/YO_HDR to the ROOT activity category.

SAP Yard LogisticsOperations Information C U S T O M E R 177

This report shall only run once using transaction SA38 during migration and it should run for all your yard numbers.

Customizing Activity "Define Yard Numbers"

Before Release 2, you can define yard number properties in Customizing activity Define Yard Numbers by choosing your central EWM business system and EWM warehouse number. Now, in Release 2, this can be defined per Yard Order Item individually, that is, multiple warehouses per Yard Order. Also, the field TU Mapping Type is removed, as this mapping is now based on the field External Document ID (which is filled with the SAP TM's freight order, if the source system is an SAP TM system). Therefore, these fields have been removed from this screen. The Dangerous Goods field is still available but moved down to the additional fields for defining the Dangerous Goods Check and the Dangerous Goods Source from where the system reads the Dangerous Goods data.

Customizing Activity "Map TM Freight Order Types"

In Release 2, in this Customizing activity, a new flag to determine the mapping between the items for the freight order from SAP TM and the items to the Yard Request can be defined:

● When the mapping type is 1 – Duplicate external hierarchy, no additional logic is needed. The system copies one to one the item hierarchy from TM.

● When the mapping type is 2 – Consider TU Loading Hierarchy, the items will be loaded on the parent item, only when the TU Loading Hierarchy already maintained in SAP Yard Logistics allows this. If the loading hierarchy does not allow it, the item is placed on the same level as its corresponding parent item.

Customizing Activity "Map TM Relevant TU Types for Yard Request"

In this Customizing activity, an additional column for Equipment /Vehicle Type is added, that is, now the TU types can be determined more granular by using the equipment plus the means of transport from SAP TM.

Customizing Activity "Define Default Activity Types"

In this Customizing activity, the time points for the default activities are changed. The time point for 1=During Yard Request Release is deleted. Now only the time points 0=During Yard Request Creation or 2=During Yard Order Creation are possible.

178 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Operations Information

Customizing Activity "Define Whether to Activate Yard Task of Yard Order Automatically"

In the previous release, the system triggered the automatic activation of the first yard task and the follow up tasks using the SAP Post Processing Framework. As this implies some technical drawbacks, these PPF actions were removed and this new Customizing activity is implemented.

12.3 Technical Configuration

Use

The following sections contain information that is related to the operation of the web-based applications provided in SAP Yard Logistics:

● Yard transportation unit overview (WDCA_YARD_TU)● Yard cockpit (WD_COCKPIT_NEW)● Color picker (WD_COLOR_PICKER)● Yard editor (WD_YARD_EDITOR)● Yard order (WD_YO)● Yard order check-in and check-out (WD_YO_CICO)● Yard order overview (WD_YO_POWL)● Assignment of TU to yard order (WD_YO_TU)● Yard request (WD_YR)● Yard request overview (WD_YR_POWL)● Yard task (WD_YT)● Yard transportation unit (WD_YTU)● Yard task overview (WD_YT_POWL)

These applications are based on the Web Dynpro for ABAP technology. Therefore, we strongly recommend that you read the operations information available for this UI technology first. This information is provided with the documentation for your SAP NetWeaver release. You can access this information on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/nw .

You must also activate the corresponding SICF nodes to the applications (mentioned in brackets).

For more information, see Activating ICF Services. Go to http://help.sap.com/nw74 and choose Application Help UI Technologies in SAP NetWeaver . Go to Web Dynpro ABAP and Floorplan Manager Web Dynpro ABAP Web Dynpro ABAP Administration Initial System-Wide Configuration Settings for Web Dynpro ABAP .

Features

Yard Visualization Using SAP Visual Business

SAP Yard LogisticsOperations Information C U S T O M E R 179

To see the yard visualization, the SAP Visual Business front-end component needs to be installed (see section 5.2). Based on this technical setup, the yard objects to be visualized need to be completed using the yard object editor.

SAP Fiori Launchpad and Mobile Apps

To enable the usage of the SAP Fiori Launchpad, first it must be set up in a proper way as described in section on Installation and Setup [page 173]. Once you have done this, you must provide role­specific authorizations to your business users to access the Fiori Launchpad applications. To this end, you have to assign the following pre­defined roles to the users:

Technical Role Description Notes

/SAPYL/YTASK_APP SAP Yard Logistics – Backend Role for Fiori App – Yard Task Confirmation

Only relevant for the SAPUI5 user inter­face

/SAPYL/SELFCHECKIN_APP SAP Yard Logistics - Back end role for Fiori App – Self Check-In

Only relevant for the SAPUI5 user inter­face

/SAPYLUI/BCR_YARDOPERATOR_T SAP Yard Logistics – Business Role for Yard Operator

Only relevant for the SAPUI5 user inter­face

/SAPYLUI/BCR_GATEAGENT_T Business Role for Yard Gate Agent Only relevant for the SAPUI5 user inter­face

/SAPYLUI/TCR_T SAP YL – Technical Role for Fiori Launch­pad

Only relevant for the SAPUI5 user inter­face

After that, populate the launchpad with the right apps. For this, you can use transaction /UI2/FLP_CONF – Fiori Launchpad Designer.

SAP Yard Logistics provides the following catalogs available in the launchpad:

Catalog ID Description

X-SAP-UI2-CATALOGPAGE:/SAPYLUI/BC_YARDOPERATOR_T

Apps for SAP YL Yard Operator

X-SAP-UI2-CATALOGPAGE:/SAPYLUI/BCC_GATE_AGENT_T Apps for SAP YL Gate Agent

X-SAP-UI2-CATALOGPAGE:/SAPYLUI/TC_T Apps for SAP YL

To be able to start the mobile apps, semantic objects YardTask and YardOrderSelfCheckIn have been defined.

You must also activate the SICF nodes /default_host/sap/bc/ui5_ui5/sapylui/ytask (for this mobile app) and the SICF node /default_host/sap/opu/odata/sapyl/das_yard_operator_srv (for the ODATA service in the SAP Yard Logistics backend).

For the self check-in app, you must activate the SICF node /default_host/sap/opu/odata/sapyl/ self_check_in_srv.

180 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Operations Information

12.4 Monitoring Concept

Use

Monitoring is an essential task in the management of SAP technology and applications. You can find more information about monitoring in the SAP Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/nw74 . Go to System Administration and Maintenance Information Technical Operations for SAP NetWeaver .

Features

Integration Engine Monitoring and Restart

The interface connectivity between SAP Yard Logistics (SAP YL) and SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) is based on integration scenarios using SAP PI. Therefore, the monitoring of the interface between SAP TM and SAP YL can be done using transaction SXMB_MONI. It is important to mention here that this monitoring transaction is available in the sending system (for example, the SAP TM), the receiving system (for example, the SAP YL), and in the PI system connecting both the systems. Interface messages between these systems can be transferred correctly only if the messages are processed successfully in all three systems. From this transaction, you can also trigger a message re-start if the original call has ended in a failure. A Restart button to re-process the web service call is available for use in such a scenario.

Queue Monitoring

The integration engine of SAP PI as well as SAP EWM use A2A interfaces based on RFC function calls that are processed via queued RFCs. The naming of the queues have been taken over from the naming conventions of these applications. You can perform the basic monitoring using transaction SMQ1 for outbound queues, that is, qRFC calls at sender side, or transaction SMQ2 for inbound queues, that is, qRFC calls at receiver side.

Monitoring of the Post-Processing Framework

The Post-Processing Framework (PPF) is used in SAP Yard Logistics to perform follow-up process actions based on existing business objects, that is, yard orders, yard tasks and yard TUs. PPF monitoring can be performed in two different ways. The first way is directly in the FPM user interface of the single document maintenance for one of the business objects mentioned before. In these user interfaces, you will find an own UIBB area called Output Management that shows all PPF actions related to the current business object document. For example, you enter a specific yard order in the yard order FPM UI and you want to verify that it has been sent to SAP TM. You navigate to the UIBB area Output Management, and see if an entry for the PPF action Send LDAP Notification to SAP TM exists and has a green light, that is, has been processed successfully.

In the second, a more conventional method, you can use transaction SPPFP. Here, you have to enter the date and time frame of the PPF action that you want to see.

● The application, which is fixed /SAPYL/PPF for SAP YL● The action profile – /SAPYL/YO for yard orders, /SAPYL/TU for yard TUs, /SAPYL/YT for yard tasks● The action definition – one of the entries mentioned in the table below

Then, you can see a PPF action processed as resulting list entries. If you have enabled the function, from this list also you can re-trigger a PPF action.

SAP Yard LogisticsOperations Information C U S T O M E R 181

PPF Actions in SAP Yard Logistics

Business Object Action Profile Action Definition Description

Yard Task /SAPYL/EXT_COMM /SAPYL/DRIVER_COMM Send driver's notification

Yard Order /SAPYL/YO_PRINT /SAPYL/YO_PRINT_DOCUMENT

Yard Order Print (automated)

Yard Order /SAPYL/YO_PRINT /SAPYL/YO_PRINT_DOCUMENT_MAN

Yard Order Print (manual)

Yard Request /SAPYL/YR_PRINT /SAPYL/YR_PRINT_DOCUMENT

Yard Request Print (auto­mated)

Yard Request /SAPYL/YR_PRINT /SAPYL/YR_PRINT_DOCUMENT_MAN

Yard Request Print (manual)

Yard Task /SAPYL/YT_PRINT /SAPYL/YT_PRINT_DOCUMENT

Yard Task Print (automated)

Yard Task /SAPYL/YT_PRINT /SAPYL/YT_PRINT_DOCUMENT_MAN

Yard Task Print (manual)

Monitoring in the Yard Cockpit

The Yard Cockpit is a monitoring tool that enables you to see all activities within a yard based on the operational documents as well as the current situation using a graphical way.

To support these needs, the Yard Cockpit is split into several areas. The right side of the screen contains the Visual Yard, which is the display of the current situation within the yard in a graphical way. On the left side of the screen, you can see the lists for yard orders, yard tasks, resources, and so on.

Technically, in these areas UIBBs are shown in the FPM application, which allows for the efficient filtering and display of the operational business documents, for example, yard tasks, yard orders, TUs, and so on.

In the Yard Cockpit, the different UIBBs mentioned in the table below are treated independently. This means, for example, one Yard Order in the Yard Order UIBB has no impact on the display of the Visual Yard.

Available UIBBs in the Yard Cockpit

UIBB Description

Yard Tasks With this UIBB, you can filter and display yard tasks based on different criteria such as creating new ones and editing exist­ing ones.

Yard Orders With this UIBB, you can filter and display yard orders based on different criteria.

Transportation Units With this UIBB, you can filter and display TUs based on differ­ent criteria.

182 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Operations Information

UIBB Description

Alerts With this UIBB, you can filter and display alerts based on dif­ferent criteria.

Resources With this UIBB, you can filter and display resources based on different criteria.

Note that you can click the person symbol on the upper right corner to determine the layout of the yard cockpit.Monitoring the Driver's Communication via SMS

In SAP Yard Logistics, it is used to send an SMS for driver advice after the check-in of a Yard Order document. This makes use of SAPconnect, a functionality to set up different communication possibilities sent from the SAP system. To monitor the SMS sent, you can use transaction SOST.

RememberYou find this documentation on the SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver 7.4. Go to SAP Help portal at http://help.sap.com and choose Technology Platform SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver 7.4 Application Help . Go to Function-Oriented View Application Server Application Server ABAP Other Services . Then select Services for Business Users SAPconnect .

Logging and Tracing

Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems.

● For general information about traces, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/nw703 and choose Application Help Function-Oriented View . Go to SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability Application Server ABAP Administration of Application Server ABAP Monitoring and Administration Tools for Application Server ABAP Trace Functions .

● You can also see SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/nw74 and choose Application Help Function-Oriented View . Go to SAP NetWeaver Library: Function-Oriented View Application Server ABAPAdministration of Application Server ABAP Monitoring and Administration Tools for Application Server ABAP

Trace Functions .

In the following section, the logging concept is described in detail.

Application Log

The application log is a re-use tool that collects messages, exceptions, and errors. This information is organized and displayed in a log. As the technical basis is SAP EWM, all SAP Yard Logistics related logs are stored using object /SCWM/WME. This enables the switching of log messages per SAP user and warehouse.

Application Log Sub Objects for SAP Yard Logistics

Sub Objects Description

/SAPYL/INTERFACE_EWM EWM Interface Messages

SAP Yard LogisticsOperations Information C U S T O M E R 183

Sub Objects Description

/SAPYL/YARD_TU Yard Transportation Unit

/SAPYL/YC Yard Cockpit

/SAPYL/YO Yard Order / Request

/SAPYL/YR_REL Yard Request Release (by report)

/SAPYL/YT Yard Task

/SAPYL/YT_DLOC_DET Yard Task Destination Location Determination

/SAPYL/YT_QDET Yard Task Queue Determination

/SAPYL/RESET_SEQ Storage Bin Sequencing

For general information about application logs, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/nw74 and choose Application Help Function-Oriented View . Go to SAP NetWeaver Library: Function-Oriented View Solution Life Cycle Management Application Log .

Alert Monitoring

Proactive automatic monitoring is the basis for ensuring reliable operations for your SAP system environment. SAP Yard Logistics is technically based on SAP NetWeaver Application Server, and reuses the Alert Monitor framework used in SAP SCM Basis. You can set up the basic customizing using transaction /SCMB/ALENCFG – Alert Engine Configuration.

The possible alert categorization is defined via alert structures. These structures represent special topics for alerting. The following table shows the predefined alert structures:

Alert Structures in SAP Yard Logistics

Alert Structure Name

2800 SYL: YT Exception

2810 SYL: Time Based Alerts

2820 SYL: Arrival and Departure

2830 SYL: Storage Bin Block

2840 SYL: Transportation Unit Block

2850 SYL: Thresholds

Based on the alert categorization, you can define the specific alert messages called alert types. The following table shows the pre­defined alert types:

Alert Object Types in SAP Yard Logistics

184 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Operations Information

Alert Type Alert Description

2801 Transportation Unit Damaged

2802 Transportation Unit Blocked

2811 Transportation Unit in Yard

2813 Check-In Delayed

2814 Check-Out Delayed

2821 Arrival Date/Time is Passed

2822 Departure Date/Time is Passed

2831 Storage Bin Blocked for Putaways

2832 Storage Bin Blocked for Stock Removal

2833 Storage Bin Blocked for Putaways and Stock Removal

2841 Transportation Unit General Block

2851 Threshold exceeded

To monitor the specific alerts created by the SAP Yard Logistics solution, you can use transaction /SAPAPO/AMON1. Select one of the overall alert profiles showing all alerts for SAP Yard Logistics to see all posted alerts.

Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors

SAP Yard Logistics uses the standard tools available in SAP NetWeaver and does not require a component­specific tool. For the business documents of yard orders (and yard requests), yard tasks and yard TUs, the archiving adapter of the Business Objects Processing Framework is used. For more information, see the SAP NetWeaver Operations Guide on SAP Help Portal https://help.sap.com/nw. You can archive the following data in SAP Yard Logistics:

Archiving Objects for SAP Yard Logistics

Business document Archiving Object Report Description

Yard Request and Yard Order /SAPYL/YO /SAPYL/ARCH_YARD_ORDER_PRE

Archiving of BO /SAPYL/YARD_ORDER: Preprocessing Program

/SAPYL/ARCH_YARD_ORDER_WRI

Archiving of BO /SAPYL/YARD_ORDER: Writing Pro­gram

/SAPYL/ARCH_YARD_ORDER_DEL

Archiving of BO /SAPYL/YARD_ORDER: Deletion Pro­gram

SAP Yard LogisticsOperations Information C U S T O M E R 185

Business document Archiving Object Report Description

Yard Tasks /SAPYL/YT /SAPYL/ARCH_YARD_TASK_PRE

Archiving of BO /SAPYL/YARD_TASK: Preprocessing Program

/SAPYL/ARCH_YARD_TASK_WRI

Archiving of BO /SAPYL/YARD_TASK: Writing Program

/SAPYL/ARCH_YARD_TASK_DEL

Archiving of BO /SAPYL/YARD_TASK: Deletion Pro­gram

Yard Transportation Units /SAPYL/TU /SAPYL/ARCH_YARD_TU_PRE Archiving of BO /SAPYL/YARD_TU: Preprocessing Pro­gram

/SAPYL/ARCH_YARD_TU_WRI Archiving of BO /SAPYL/YARD_TU: Writing Program

/SAPYL/ARCH_YARD_TU_DEL Archiving of BO /SAPYL/YARD_TU: Deletion Program

In addition to the archiving objects, SAP Yard Logistics also provides specific ILM-enabled entities that are linked to the archiving objects mentioned above. The following table gives an overview on these ILM objects for SAP Yard Logistics. For more details on how they can be used, see the online help item Making SAP NetWeaver ILM Available at http://help.sap.com/saphelp_scm700_ehp01/helpdata/en/b0/3f9fd868c14b5696554766234884f8/content.htm?frameset=/en/09/ec83476f0942bcaea4481bc02ddf23/frameset.htm&current_toc=/en/35/aaef16745644c397ec0024b31fb191/plain.htm&node_id=3&show_children=false.

ILM Objects for SAP Yard Logistics (see transaction IRM_CUST)

ILM Object Description

SAPYL_YO ILM Object for Yard Orders

SAPYL_YT ILM Object for Yard Tasks

SAPYL_YTU ILM Object for Yard TUs

186 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Operations Information

12.5 Administration and Management

Administration and Management consists of the following activities:

Backup and Recovery

You need to back up your system landscape regularly to ensure that you can restore and recover it in case of failure. The backup and restore strategy for the application consists of the following:

● Backup and restore coverage for each component● Cross-system data dependencies and handling

The backup and restore strategy for your system landscape must not only consider SAP systems but must also be embedded in the overall business requirements and incorporate your company’s entire process flow. In addition, the backup and restore strategy must cover disaster recovery processes, such as, the loss of a data center through fire. In this context, it is essential that you ensure that backup devices are not lost together with normal data storage, by using separate storage locations.

SAP Yard Logistics is – as SAP EWM 9.3 – based on SAP NetWeaver technology. All related SAP NetWeaver backup procedures also work for SAP Yard Logistics. Therefore, there is no special procedure for this component. For more information on backup and recovery, see http://help.sap.com/nw74 . Go to System Administration and Maintenance Information Operations Information .

Periodical Tasks

In addition to the standard jobs mentioned in Technical Operations for SAP NetWeaver (see http://help.sap.com/nw74 . Go to System Administration and Maintenance Information Technical Operations for SAP NetWeaver ). You must schedule SAP EWM­specific jobs in your SAP system. You must run all jobs, unless otherwise specified, at times of minimal system activity, so as not to affect performance or otherwise disrupt your daily operations. You can restart all jobs.

To release multiple yard requests based on their planned arrival or departure dates, automated via a background process, the business can use transaction /SAPYL/MASS_YR_ACTIV to release multiple Yard Requests on a planned arrival or departure date.

High Availability Concept

SAP Yard Logistics uses standard SAP NetWeaver functions for high availability. For more information about high availability, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/nw74 and choose

Application Help Function-Oriented View . Go to Solution Life Cycle Management SAP Business Continuity .

SAP Yard LogisticsOperations Information C U S T O M E R 187

Starting and Stopping

SAP Yard Logistics is installed as Add-on to SAP EWM 9.3. Therefore, consult the starting and stopping procedure valid for SAP EWM 9.3. See SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/ewm93 and choose System Administration and Maintenance Information Application Operations Guide . Go to Starting and Stopping.

Scenario Administration and Maintenance Concept

SAP Yard Logistics uses standard SAP NetWeaver functions and is based on SAP EWM 9.3. Therefore, consult the starting and stopping procedure valid for SAP EWM 9.3. See SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/ewm93and choose System Administration and Maintenance Information Application Operations Guide . Go to Starting and Stopping.

Software Change Management

Software Change Management standardizes and automates software distribution, maintenance, and testing procedures for complex software landscapes and multiple software development platforms. These functions support your project teams, development teams, and application support teams.

The goal of Software Change Management is to establish consistent, solution-wide change management that allows for specific maintenance procedures, global rollouts (including localizations), and open integration with third-party products.

This section provides additional information about the most important software components.

● Transport and Change Management: Enables and secures the distribution of software changes from the development environment to the quality. For transport and change management issues, the procedures of SAP NetWeaver apply for SAP Yard Logistics. For more information, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/nw74 and choose System Administration and Maintenance Information Technical Operations for SAP NetWeaver . Go to Administration of Application Server ABAPChange and Transport System .

● The SAP Yard Logistics component is a server component that uses the standard ABAP Transport Management System (TMS) for software logistics. The SAP Yard Logistics application component belongs to the technical software layer SAPYL (for the SAP YL applications besides the SAPUI5 application) and to SAPYLUI (for the SAP YL’s UI5 application). Updates to these components are supplied through SAP Notes or the SAP Note Assistant and support packages.

● Support Packages and SAP Notes Implementation: Provides standardized software distribution and maintenance procedures. Patches for the components are available either as regular support packages or as SAP Notes. To download the SAP Notes, use SAP Solution Manager or the SAP Note Assistant.

188 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Operations Information

Support Desk Management

Support Desk Management enables you to set up an efficient internal support desk for your support organization that seamlessly integrates your end users, internal support employees, partners, and SAP Active Global Support specialists with an efficient problem resolution procedure.

For support desk management, you need the methodology, management procedures, and tools infrastructure to run your internal support organization efficiently. SAP Support needs to be able to work remotely for highest efficiency and availability. Therefore, all required support tools must be remotely accessible for SAP support. For SAP YL, the standard SAP procedures for setting up remote support apply.

For information about Remote Support Setup, see http://support.sap.com/remoteconnection .

For information about reporting incidents and forwarding them to SAP, see http://support.sap.com .

For sending incidents/problem messages/tickets to SAP, choose the appropriate component (or sub component) name from the SAP component hierarchy:

Component Component Name Notes

SCM-YL SAP Yard Logistics For all messages to SAP YL processes and applications (except the mobile app for yard operations)

SCM-YL-FIO SAP Yard Logistics Fiori For all messages related to the mobile app for yard operations

Troubleshooting

For information about troubleshooting SAP NetWeaver, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/nw74 and choose System Administration and Maintenance Information Technical Operations for SAP NetWeaver . The following tools are available for troubleshooting SAP Yard Logistics:

● Application Logs – For more information, see section on Logging and Tracing.● SAP EWM Troubleshooting – Consult the chapter on Troubleshooting valid for SAP EWM 9.3. See SAP Help

Portal at http://help.sap.com/ewm93 and choose System Administration and Maintenance InformationApplication Operations Guide . Go to the chapter on Troubleshooting.

Tips and Tricks for Troubleshooting

SAP Yard LogisticsOperations Information C U S T O M E R 189

Issue Resolution

The visualization of the yard cockpit looks strange and you have defined the items in a correct way.

Clear the cache of the Visual Business GUIBB.

The SAP Visual Business control in the browser caches map tiles on the front-end machine. It may be necessary to clear the cache if you encounter mis­fitting map tiles.

The cache content is controlled through the Visual Business Property window that you can open with Ctrl + Alt + Right click . The window offers a Cache tab, which shows

you the actual cache location and its content. Furthermore, it allows you to clear the cache completely.

See http://help.sap.com/visualbusiness21 , open the appli­cation help, navigate to visual business elements, cache control.

The visualization of the yard cockpit is not starting or shows a white space or an error message "No map can be displayed for VisBis UIBB"

This is an issue in the browser security, for example, Internet Explorer 11, and for the browser, you have to allow "insecure" ActiveX controls.

Also, compare SAP Note 2305753 .

There is an issue in a Web Dynpro ABAP that is only reproduci­ble by a specific user.

This issue may be represented by a blank screen, a dump or a time-out error.

See SAP Note 2198046 - How to resolve user­specific is­sues in Web Dynpro ABAP and use WD application WD_ANALYZE_CONFIG_USER

Changes to BO field control for yard orders, yard requests or yard tasks are not up-to-date after transport.

Open transaction SHMM, then find the shared area /BOFU/CL_BO_FIELDCONTROL_SHM and select Delete All Instances button on the table toolbar. Then refresh Web Dynpro applica­tion and all the fields are disabled according to the updated field control database table.

CautionIf several business users are using Web Dynpro applica­tions in parallel, then they may receive a dump because the shared memory instances are deleted

You have changed Customizing settings for the self check-in app but you still see the old version in the target system

The target system's client cache needs a refresh for your user. Therefore, start transaction SA38 and run the report /UI2/INVALIDATE_CLIENT_CACHE

You are using the NWBC locally and have empty F4 value help lists

The reason is a browser bug released in a security patch in May by Microsoft, which causes that issue. See SAP Note 2375211 .

190 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Operations Information

Issue Resolution

The queues are hanging and you want to automate their re­start

You can schedule the following reports on a regular time base:

● RSQOWKEX: Restart QOUT qRFC LUWs

● RSQIWKEX: Restart QIN qRFC LUWs

For more information, please consult the SAP Note 813029- Automatic processing of failed XI messages

SAP Yard LogisticsOperations Information C U S T O M E R 191

Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

Coding SamplesAny software coding and/or code lines / strings ("Code") included in this documentation are only examples and are not intended to be used in a productive system environment. The Code is only intended to better explain and visualize the syntax and phrasing rules of certain coding. SAP does not warrant the correctness and completeness of the Code given herein, and SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the usage of the Code, unless damages were caused by SAP intentionally or by SAP's gross negligence.

Gender-Neutral LanguageAs far as possible, SAP documentation is gender neutral. Depending on the context, the reader is addressed directly with "you", or a gender-neutral noun (such as "sales person" or "working days") is used. If when referring to members of both sexes, however, the third-person singular cannot be avoided or a gender-neutral noun does not exist, SAP reserves the right to use the masculine form of the noun and pronoun. This is to ensure that the documentation remains comprehensible.

Internet HyperlinksThe SAP documentation may contain hyperlinks to the Internet. These hyperlinks are intended to serve as a hint about where to find related information. SAP does not warrant the availability and correctness of this related information or the ability of this information to serve a particular purpose. SAP shall not be liable for any damages caused by the use of related information unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct. All links are categorized for transparency (see: https://help.sap.com/viewer/disclaimer).

192 C U S T O M E RSAP Yard Logistics

Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

SAP Yard LogisticsImportant Disclaimers and Legal Information C U S T O M E R 193

go.sap.com/registration/contact.html

© 2018 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. National product specifications may vary.These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP or SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies.Please see https://www.sap.com/corporate/en/legal/copyright.html for additional trademark information and notices.